Communications engineering / telecommunications Books

Book SynopsisProvides an up-to-date, in-depth look at the current research, design, and implementation of cooperative vehicle safety communication protocols and technology Improving traffic safety has been a top concern for transportation agencies around the world and the focus of heavy research and development efforts sponsored by both governments and private industries. Cooperative vehicle systemswhich use sensors and wireless technologies to reduce traffic accidentscan play a major role in making the world''s roads safer. Vehicle Safety Communications: Protocols, Security, and Privacy describes fundamental issues in cooperative vehicle safety and recent advances in technologies for enabling cooperative vehicle safety. It gives an overview of traditional vehicle safety issues, the evolution of vehicle safety technologies, and the need for cooperative systems where vehicles work together to reduce the number of crashes or mitigate damage when crashes become unavoidabTable of ContentsForeword xv Ralf G. Herrtwich Foreword xvii Flavio Bonomi Foreword xix Adam Drobot Preface xxi Acknowledgments xxv 1 Traffic Safety 1 1.1 Traffic Safety Facts 1 1.1.1 Fatalities 2 1.1.2 Leading Causes of Crashes 3 1.1.3 Current Trends 5 1.2 European Union 5 1.3 Japan 7 1.4 Developing Countries 7 References 8 2 Automotive Safety Evolution 10 2.1 Passive Safety 10 2.1.1 Safety Cage and the Birth of Passive Safety 10 2.1.2 Seat Belts 11 2.1.3 Air Bags 11 2.2 Active Safety 12 2.2.1 Antilock Braking System 12 2.2.2 Electronic Stability Control 13 2.2.3 Brake Assist 13 2.3 Advanced Driver Assistance Systems 14 2.3.1 Adaptive Cruise Control 15 2.3.2 Blind Spot Assist 16 2.3.3 Attention Assist 16 2.3.4 Precrash Systems 16 2.4 Cooperative Safety 17 References 18 3 Vehicle Architectures 20 3.1 Electronic Control Units 20 3.2 Vehicle Sensors 21 3.2.1 Radars 21 3.2.2 Cameras 21 3.3 Onboard Communication Networks 22 3.3.1 Controller Area Network 23 3.3.2 Local Interconnect Network 23 3.3.3 FlexRay 24 3.3.4 Media Oriented Systems Transport 24 3.3.5 Onboard Diagnostics 24 3.4 Vehicle Data 25 3.5 Vehicle Data Security 26 3.6 Vehicle Positioning 27 3.6.1 Global Positioning System 27 3.6.2 Galileo 29 3.6.3 Global Navigation Satellite System 29 3.6.4 Positioning Accuracy 30 References 30 4 Connected Vehicles 32 4.1 Connected Vehicle Applications 32 4.1.1 Hard Safety Applications 32 4.1.2 Soft Safety Applications 33 4.1.3 Mobility and Convenience Applications 33 4.2 Uniqueness in Consumer Vehicle Networks 34 4.3 Vehicle Communication Modes 36 4.3.1 Vehicle-to-Vehicle Local Broadcast 36 4.3.2 V2V Multihop Message Dissemination 37 4.3.3 Infrastructure-to-Vehicle Local Broadcast 38 4.3.4 Vehicle-to-Infrastructure Bidirectional Communications 39 4.4 Wireless Communications Technology for Vehicles 39 References 42 5 Dedicated Short-Range Communications 44 5.1 The 5.9 GHz Spectrum 44 5.1.1 DSRC Frequency Band Usage 45 5.1.2 DSRC Channels 45 5.1.3 DSRC Operations 46 5.2 DSRC in the European Union 46 5.3 DSRC in Japan 47 5.4 DSRC Standards 48 5.4.1 Wireless Access in Vehicular Environments 48 5.4.2 Wireless Access in Vehicular Environments Protocol Stack 48 5.4.3 International Harmonization 50 References 50 6 WAVE Physical Layer 52 6.1 Physical Layer Operations 52 6.1.1 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 52 6.1.2 Modulation and Coding Rates 53 6.1.3 Frame Reception 54 6.2 PHY Amendments 55 6.2.1 Channel Width 56 6.2.2 Spectrum Masks 56 6.2.3 Improved Receiver Performance 57 6.3 PHY Layer Modeling 57 6.3.1 Network Simulator Architecture 58 6.3.2 RF Model 59 6.3.3 Wireless PHY 61 References 62 7 WAVE Media Access Control Layer 64 7.1 Media Access Control Layer Operations 64 7.1.1 Carrier Sensing Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance 64 7.1.2 Hidden Terminal Effects 65 7.1.3 Basic Service Set 66 7.2 MAC Layer Amendments 66 7.3 MAC Layer Modeling 67 7.3.1 Transmission 68 7.3.2 Reception 68 7.3.3 Channel State Manager 68 7.3.4 Back-Off Manager 69 7.3.5 Transmission Coordination 70 7.3.6 Reception Coordination 71 7.4 Overhauled ns-2 Implementation 72 References 74 8 DSRC Data Rates 75 8.1 Introduction 75 8.2 Communication Density 76 8.2.1 Simulation Study 77 8.2.2 Broadcast Reception Rates 78 8.2.3 Channel Access Delay 81 8.2.4 Frames Reception Failures 83 8.3 Optimal Data Rate 85 8.3.1 Modulation and Coding Rates 85 8.3.2 Simulation Study 86 8.3.3 Simulation Matrix 87 8.3.4 Simulation Results 88 References 91 9 WAVE Upper Layers 93 9.1 Introduction 93 9.2 DSRC Multichannel Operations 94 9.2.1 Time Synchronization 94 9.2.2 Synchronization Intervals 95 9.2.3 Guard Intervals 96 9.2.4 Channel Switching 96 9.2.5 Channel Switching State Machine 96 9.3 Protocol Evaluation 97 9.3.1 Simulation Study 98 9.3.2 Simulation Scenarios 99 9.3.3 Simulation Results 99 9.3.4 Protocol Enhancements 102 9.4 WAVE Short Message Protocol 103 References 104 10 Vehicle-to-Infrastructure Safety Applications 106 10.1 Intersection Crashes 106 10.2 Cooperative Intersection Collision Avoidance System for Violations 107 10.2.1 CICAS-V Design 107 10.2.2 CICAS-V Development 110 10.2.3 CICAS-V Testing 116 10.3 Integrated Safety Demonstration 118 10.3.1 Demonstration Concept 118 10.3.2 Hardware Components 120 10.3.3 Demo Design 121 References 124 11 Vehicle-to-Vehicle Safety Applications 126 11.1 Cooperation among Vehicles 126 11.2 V2V Safety Applications 127 11.3 V2V Safety Applications Design 128 11.3.1 Basic Safety Messages 129 11.3.2 Minimum Performance Requirements 129 11.3.3 Target Classifi cation 131 11.3.4 Vehicle Representation 132 11.3.5 Sample Applications 133 11.4 System Implementation 135 11.4.1 Onboard Unit Hardware Components 135 11.4.2 OBU Software Architecture 135 11.4.3 Driver–Vehicle Interface 137 11.5 System Testing 138 11.5.1 Communications Coverage and Antenna Considerations 138 11.5.2 Positioning 139 References 140 12 DSRC Scalability 141 12.1 Introduction 141 12.2 DSRC Data Traffic 142 12.2.1 DSRC Safety Messages 142 12.2.2 Transmission Parameters 143 12.2.3 Channel Load Assessment 144 12.3 Congestion Control Algorithms 145 12.3.1 Desired Properties 145 12.3.2 Transmission Power Adjustment 146 12.3.3 Message Rate Adjustment 147 12.3.4 Simulation Study 148 12.4 Conclusions 148 References 149 13 Security and Privacy Threats and Requirements 151 13.1 Introduction 151 13.2 Adversaries 151 13.3 Security Threats 152 13.3.1 Send False Safety Messages Using Valid Security Credentials 152 13.3.2 Falsely Accuse Innocent Vehicles 153 13.3.3 Impersonate Vehicles or Other Network Entities 153 13.3.4 Denial-of-Service Attacks Specific to Consumer Vehicle Networks 154 13.3.5 Compromise OBU Software or Firmware 155 13.4 Privacy Threats 155 13.4.1 Privacy in a Vehicle Network 155 13.4.2 Privacy Threats in Consumer Vehicle Networks 156 13.4.3 How Driver Privacy can be Breached Today 158 13.5 Basic Security Capabilities 159 13.5.1 Authentication 159 13.5.2 Misbehavior Detection and Revocation 160 13.5.3 Data Integrity 160 13.5.4 Data Confidentiality 160 13.6 Privacy Protections Capabilities 161 13.7 Design and Performance Considerations 161 13.7.1 Scalability 162 13.7.2 Balancing Competing Requirements 162 13.7.3 Minimal Side Effects 163 13.7.4 Quantifi able Levels of Security and Privacy 163 13.7.5 Adaptability 163 13.7.6 Security and Privacy Protection for V2V Broadcast 163 13.7.7 Security and Privacy Protection for Communications with Security Servers 164 References 165 14 Cryptographic Mechanisms 167 14.1 Introduction 167 14.2 Categories of Cryptographic Mechanisms 167 14.2.1 Cryptographic Hash Functions 168 14.2.2 Symmetric Key Algorithms 169 14.2.3 Public Key (Asymmetric Key) Algorithms 170 14.3 Digital Signature Algorithms 172 14.3.1 The RSA Algorithm 172 14.3.2 The DSA Algorithm 178 14.3.3 The ECDSA Algorithm 184 14.3.4 ECDSA for Vehicle Safety Communications 194 14.4 Message Authentication and Message Integrity Verifi cation 196 14.4.1 Authentication and Integrity Verifi cation Using Hash Functions 197 14.4.2 Authentication and Integrity Verifi cation Using Digital Signatures 198 14.5 Diffi e–Hellman Key Establishment Protocol 200 14.5.1 The Original Diffie–Hellman Key Establishment Protocol 200 14.5.2 Elliptic Curve Diffie–Hellman Key Establishment Protocol 201 14.6 Elliptic Curve Integrated Encryption Scheme (ECIES) 202 14.6.1 The Basic Idea 202 14.6.2 Scheme Setup 202 14.6.3 Encrypt a Message 202 14.6.4 Decrypt a Message 204 14.6.5 Performance 204 References 206 15 Public Key Infrastructure for Vehicle Networks 209 15.1 Introduction 209 15.2 Public Key Certificates 210 15.3 Message Authentication with Certificates 211 15.4 Certifi cate Revocation List 212 15.5 A Baseline Reference Vehicular PKI Model 213 15.6 Confi gure Initial Security Parameters and Assign Initial Certificates 215 15.6.1 Vehicles Create Their Private and Public Keys 216 15.6.2 Certificate Authority Creates Private and Public Keys for Vehicles 217 15.7 Acquire New Keys and Certifi cates 217 15.8 Distribute Certifi cates to Vehicles for Signature Verifications 220 15.9 Detect Misused Certifi cates and Misbehaving Vehicles 222 15.9.1 Local Misbehavior Detection 223 15.9.2 Global Misbehavior Detection 224 15.9.3 Misbehavior Reporting 224 15.10 Ways for Vehicles to Acquire CRLs 226 15.11 How Often CRLs should be Distributed to Vehicles? 228 15.12 PKI Hierarchy 230 15.12.1 Certifi cate Chaining to Enable Hierarchical CAs 231 15.12.2 Hierarchical CA Architecture Example 231 15.13 Privacy-Preserving Vehicular PKI 233 15.13.1 Quantitative Measurements of Vehicle Anonymity 234 15.13.2 Quantitative Measurement of Message Unlinkability 234 References 235 16 Privacy Protection with Shared Certificates 237 16.1 Shared Certificates 237 16.2 The Combinatorial Certificate Scheme 237 16.3 Certificate Revocation Collateral Damage 239 16.4 Certified Intervals 242 16.4.1 The Concept of Certified Interval 242 16.4.2 Certified Interval Produced by the Original Combinatorial Certificate Scheme 242 16.5 Reduce Collateral Damage and Improve Certified Interval 244 16.5.1 Reduce Collateral Damage Caused by a Single Misused Certificate 245 16.5.2 Vehicles Become Statistically Distinguishable When Misusing Multiple Certificates 248 16.5.3 The Dynamic Reward Algorithm 250 16.6 Privacy in Low Vehicle Density Areas 253 16.6.1 The Problem 253 16.6.2 The Blend-In Algorithm to Improve Privacy 256 References 259 17 Privacy Protection with Short-Lived Unique Certificates 260 17.1 Short-Lived Unique Certificates 260 17.2 The Basic Short-Lived Certificate Scheme 261 17.3 The Problem of Large CRL 263 17.4 Anonymously Linked Certificates to Reduce CRL Size 264 17.4.1 Certificate Tags 264 17.4.2 CRL Processing by Vehicles 265 17.4.3 Backward Unlinkability 267 17.5 Reduce CRL Search Time 268 17.6 Unlinked Short-Lived Certificates 269 17.7 Reduce the Volume of Certificate Request and Response Messages 270 17.8 Determine the Number of Certificates for Each Vehicle 270 References 273 18 Privacy Protection with Group Signatures 274 18.1 Group Signatures 274 18.2 Zero-Knowledge Proof of Knowledge 275 18.3 The ACJT Group Signature Scheme and its Extensions 277 18.3.1 The ACJT Group Signature Scheme 277 18.3.2 The Challenge of Group Membership Revocation 282 18.3.3 ACJT Extensions to Support Membership Revocation 283 18.4 The CG Group Signature Scheme with Revocation 286 18.5 The Short Group Signatures Scheme 288 18.5.1 The Short Group Signatures Scheme 288 18.5.2 Membership Revocation 291 18.6 Group Signature Schemes with Verifier-Local Revocation 292 References 293 19 Privacy Protection against Certificate Authorities 295 19.1 Introduction 295 19.2 Basic Idea 295 19.3 Baseline Split CA Architecture, Protocol, and Message Processing 297 19.4 Split CA Architecture for Shared Certifi cates 301 19.5 Split CA Architecture for Unlinked Short-Lived Certificates 302 19.5.1 Acquire One Unlinked Certifi cate at a Time 302 19.5.2 Assign Batches of Unlinked Short-Lived Certifi cates 304 19.5.3 Revoke Batches of Unlinked Certifi cates 306 19.5.4 Request for Decryption Keys for Certificate Batches 307 19.6 Split CA Architecture for Anonymously Linked Short-Lived Certificates 308 19.6.1 Assign One Anonymously Linked Short-Lived Certificate at a Time 308 19.6.2 Assign Batches of Anonymously Linked Short-Lived Certificates 311 19.6.3 Revoke Batches of Anonymously Linked Short-Lived Certificates 312 19.6.4 Request for Decryption Keys for Certificate Batches 313 References 314 20 Comparison of Privacy-Preserving Certificate Management Schemes 315 20.1 Introduction 315 20.2 Comparison of Main Characteristics 316 20.3 Misbehavior Detection 320 20.4 Abilities to Prevent Privacy Abuse by CA and MDS Operators 321 20.5 Summary 322 21 IEEE 1609.2 Security Services 323 21.1 Introduction 323 21.2 The IEEE 1609.2 Standard 323 21.3 Certificates and Certificate Authority Hierarchy 325 21.4 Formats for Public Key, Signature, Certificate, and CRL 327 21.4.1 Public Key Formats 327 21.4.2 Signature Formats 328 21.4.3 Certificate Format 329 21.4.4 CRL Format 332 21.5 Message Formats and Processing for Generating Encrypted Messages 333 21.6 Sending Messages 335 21.7 Request Certifi cates from the CA 336 21.8 Request and Processing CRL 343 21.9 What the Current IEEE 1609.2 Standard Does Not Cover 344 21.9.1 No Support for Anonymous Message Authentication 344 21.9.2 Separate Vehicle-CA Communication Protocols Are Required 344 21.9.3 Interactions and Interfaces between CA Entities Not Addressed / 346 References 346 22 4G for Vehicle Safety Communications 347 22.1 Introduction 347 22.2 Long-Term Revolution (LTE) 347 22.3 LTE for Vehicle Safety Communications/ 353 22.3.1 Issues to Be Addressed 353 22.3.2 LTE for V2I Safety Communications 353 22.3.3 LTE for V2V Safety Communications 356 22.3.4 LTE Broadcast and Multicast Services 357 References 358 Glossary 360 Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the ever-increasing problem of information overload from both the professional and academic perspectives. Focusing on the needs of practicing engineers and professional communicators, it addresses the causes and costs of information overload, along with strategies and techniques for reducing and minimizing its negative effects. The theoretical framework of information overload and ideas for future research are also presented. The book brings together an international group of authors, providing a truly global point of view on this important, rarely covered topic.Table of ContentsList of Practical Insights from Corporations xv List of Figures xvii List of Tables xix Foreword xxi Preface xxvii Acknowledgments xxix A Note from the Series Editor xxxi Contributors xxxiii About the Editors xxxvii 1 INFORMATION OVERLOAD: AN INTERNATIONAL CHALLENGE TO PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AND TECHNICAL COMMUNICATORS 1 Judith B. Strother, Jan M. Ulijn, and Zohra Fazal 1.1 Definitions, Causes, and Consequences of Information Overload 1 1.1.1 Definitions of Information Overload 1 1.1.2 Causes of Information Overload 2 1.1.3 Consequences of Information Overload 3 1.2 Perspectives on the Concept of Information Overload 4 1.2.1 An Information and Time-Management Perspective 5 1.2.2 A Supplier/Producer/Writer and Client/User/Reader Perspective 5 1.2.3 An International/Intercultural Perspective 7 1.2.4 An Innovation Perspective 7 1.3 Readers of this Book 7 1.4 Structure of this Book 8 1.4.1 Section I: Causes and Costs of Information Overload 8 1.4.2 Section II: Control and Reduction of Information Overload 10 References 11 SECTION I. CAUSES AND COSTS OF INFORMATION OVERLOAD 2 OF TIME MAGAZINE, 24/7 MEDIA, AND DATA DELUGE: THE EVOLUTION OF INFORMATION OVERLOAD THEORIES AND CONCEPTS 15 Debashis “Deb” Aikat and David Remund 2.1 Introduction 16 2.2 Theory and Concept of Information Overload 16 2.3 Information Overload as a Twentieth Century Phenomenon 17 2.4 Evolution of Information and Its Proliferation in Society 21 2.4.1 The Early Quest for Information and Knowledge (320 BCE–Thirteenth Century) 21 2.4.2 The Age of Renaissance (Fourteenth–Seventeenth Century) and the Printing Press 22 2.4.3 The Industrial Revolution (Eighteenth–Nineteenth Century) and Its Information Innovations 23 2.4.4 The Era of the Mind and the Machine (Twentieth Century) 24 2.4.5 Internet Boom and Information Explosion of the 1990s 27 2.4.6 Data Deluge and Information Overload in the Twenty-First Century Digital Age 28 2.5 Information Overload Concepts 29 2.5.1 Definitions of Information Overload and Related Concepts 29 2.5.2 The Context of Information Overload 30 2.5.3 Causes and Consequences of Information Overload 31 2.6 Conclusion and Four Lessons Learned 32 Acknowledgment 33 References 33 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM IBM 39 3 THE CHALLENGE OF INFORMATION BALANCE IN THE AGE OF AFFLUENT COMMUNICATION 41 Paulus Hubert Vossen 3.1 Introduction 42 3.2 Quantitative Aspects of Information Overload 43 3.3 Qualitative Aspects of Information Overload 45 3.3.1 Philosophical Perspective: Information in Science and Technology 45 3.3.2 Political Perspective: Information in Modern Society and a Global World 46 3.3.3 Economic Perspective: Information as a Commodity on the Market 47 3.3.4 Societal Perspective: Information as the Glue Between Communities 48 3.3.5 Psychological Perspective: Information as a Basis for Knowing and Acting 49 3.3.6 Ecological Perspective: Information as a Prerequisite for Living Creatures 50 3.4 Conclusion 51 3.5 A Call for Fundamental Research 52 References 53 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM XEROX 55 Xerox Takes on Information Overload 55 Identifying the Problem 55 Sharing Information 56 Sorting Information 57 Cutting Through the Clutter 57 Life-Saving Software 58 Urban Central Nervous System 58 4 FROM CAVE WALL TO TWITTER: ENGINEERS AND TECHNICAL COMMUNICATORS AS INFORMATION SHAMAN FOR DIGITAL TRIBES 61 Anne Caborn and Cary L. Cooper 4.1 Introduction: The Dawn of the Information Shaman 62 4.2 The Magic of Metaphor 64 4.3 The Audience: The Emergence of Digital Tribes 65 4.4 Quill to Keyboard: The Writer and New Media 66 4.5 Helping the Reader: Techniques for the Information Shaman 68 4.6 The Magic of Hypertext Techniques: Journeys at the Speed of Thought 70 4.7 Conclusion: The Responsibilities of the Information Shaman 72 References 73 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM THE LIMBURG MEDIA GROUP 75 Newspaper Position in The Netherlands 76 Managing Information Overload Using an Evolutionary Approach 76 A Revolutionary Perspective 77 5 THE INFLUENCE OF CULTURE ON INFORMATION OVERLOAD 79 Jan M. Ulijn and Judith B. Strother 5.1 Introduction 80 5.2 Levels of Culture 81 5.3 Cultural Patterns of Discourse Organization 82 5.4 High Context Versus Low Context 83 5.5 Internationalization Versus Localization 85 5.5.1 Latin America 86 5.5.2 Japan 87 5.5.3 China 87 5.6 The Effect of Professional Culture 88 5.7 Japan and U.S. Discourse Structures 91 5.8 Cultural Issues in Reader Versus Writer Responsibility 92 5.9 Implications for Engineers and Technical Communicators and Their Corporations 93 5.10 Conclusion 95 References 95 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM A2Z GLOBAL LANGUAGES 99 6 EFFECT OF COLOR, VISUAL FORM, AND TEXTUAL INFORMATION ON INFORMATION OVERLOAD 103 No€el T. Alton and Alan Manning 6.1 Introduction 104 6.2 Previous Studies of Decorative and Indicative Effects 106 6.3 Experiments and Results 111 6.3.1 Study One: Restaurant Menu Design 112 6.3.2 Study Two: Graph Design and Recall Accuracy 114 6.3.3 Study Three: Diagram Design and Recall Accuracy 116 6.4 Practical Implications for Engineers and Technical Communicators 117 6.5 Conclusion 119 References 121 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM APPLIED GLOBAL TECHNOLOGIES 123 7 COST OF INFORMATION OVERLOAD IN END-USER DOCUMENTATION 125 Prasanna Bidkar 7.1 Introduction 126 7.2 Information Overload 126 7.3 Causes of Information Overload 128 7.4 Sources of Noise in User Documentation 129 7.4.1 Information Content 129 7.4.2 Channel 130 7.4.3 Receiver 131 7.5 Effects of Information Overload on Users 132 7.6 The Current Study 133 7.6.1 The Survey 133 7.6.2 Results and Observations 133 7.7 Cost of Information Overload 135 7.7.1 Cost Framework 135 7.7.2 Scenario 1: Ideal Scenario 136 7.7.3 Scenario 2 136 7.7.4 Scenario 3 136 7.7.5 Scenario 4 136 7.7.6 An Example from the User’s Perspective: Denim Corp 137 7.7.7 An Example from the Producer’s Perspective: Logistics Corp 137 7.8 Conclusion 138 References 139 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM HARRIS CORPORATION 141 Sources of Information Overload 141 Strategies for Dealing with Information Overload 142 SECTION II. CONTROL AND REDUCTION OF INFORMATION OVERLOAD: EMPIRICAL EVIDENCE 8 TAMING THE TERABYTES: A HUMAN-CENTERED APPROACH TO SURVIVING THE INFORMATION DELUGE 147 Eduard Hoenkamp 8.1 Introduction 148 8.2 Reducing Information Overload by Being Precise About What We Ask for 150 8.2.1 Conversational Query Elaboration to Discover Support Groups 150 8.2.2 Constructing Verbose Queries Automatically During a Presentation 151 8.3 Steering Clear of Information Glut Through Live Visual Feedback 152 8.4 Improving Search Engines by Making Them Human Centered 156 8.4.1 Case 1: The Basic Level Category 158 8.4.2 Case 2: The Complex Nominal 162 8.4.3 Case 3: Exploiting Natural Language Properties 165 8.5 Conclusion 167 Acknowledgments 167 References 168 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM THE LABORATORY FOR QUALITY SOFTWARE 171 References 173 9 TECHNOLOGIES FOR DEALING WITH INFORMATION OVERLOAD: AN ENGINEER’S POINT OF VIEW 175 Toon Calders, George H. L. Fletcher, Faisal Kamiran, and Mykola Pechenizkiy 9.1 Introduction 176 9.2 Information Overload: Challenges and Opportunities 177 9.3 Storing and Querying Semistructured Data 179 9.3.1 XML as a Data Format for Semistructured Data 180 9.3.2 RDF as a Data Format for Semistructured Data 181 9.3.3 Remarks on the Use of XML and RDF 183 9.4 Techniques for Retrieving Information 183 9.5 Mining Large Databases for Extracting Information 187 9.6 Processing Data Streams 190 9.7 Summary 190 References 191 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM THE COLLEGE OF AERONAUTICS, FLORIDA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY 195 From Data to Information to Situational Awareness to Decisions 196 Transformative Airspace Architecture 197 Robust, Agile, and Intelligently Responsive Information-Sharing Architecture 197 Next Generation Efforts to Manage Information 198 Distributed Decision Making 199 System-Wide Information Management (SWIM) 200 Shared Situation Awareness and Collaborative Decision Making 201 Automation and Information in the NAS 201 Summary 201 References 202 10 VISUALIZING INSTEAD OF OVERLOADING: EXPLORING THE PROMISE AND PROBLEMS OF VISUAL COMMUNICATION TO REDUCE INFORMATION OVERLOAD 203 Jeanne Mengis and Martin J. Eppler 10.1 The Qualitative Side of Information Overload 204 10.2 Causes of Information Overload 206 10.3 How Information Visualization Can Improve the Quality of Information and Reduce Information Overload 208 10.4 Using Visualization in Practice: Understanding the Knowing–Doing Gap 209 10.5 Methods and Context of the Study 211 10.5.1 Measures 211 10.5.2 Procedure and Analysis 213 10.6 Indications of the Knowing–Doing Gap: Visuals Are Valued, but Poorly Used 214 10.7 Understanding the Knowing–Doing Gap with TAM 214 10.8 Discussion 216 10.9 Conclusion 217 10.10 Future Research Directions 218 10A.1 Appendix 219 References 222 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM ALVOGEN 227 The Challenges of Information Overload 227 Strategies for Dealing with Information Overload 228 11 DROWNING IN DATA: A REVIEWOF INFORMATION OVERLOAD WITHIN ORGANIZATIONS AND THE VIABILITY OF STRATEGIC COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLES 231 David Remund and Debashis “Deb” Aikat 11.1 Introduction 232 11.2 Defining Information Overload within Organizations 232 11.3 Evolution of the Information Overload Concept in Organizations 234 11.4 Implications of Information Overload within Organizations 235 11.4.1 Organizational Implications 235 11.4.2 Employee Implications 237 11.5 Traditional Strategies for Addressing Information Overload 238 11.5.1 Organizational Strategies 238 11.5.2 Individual Strategies 239 11.6 Strategic Communication Principles: A Viable Solution? 240 11.7 Putting Strategic Communication into Practice 242 11.8 Further Research 243 11.9 Conclusion 243 References 243 PRACTICAL INSIGHTS FROM THE DUTCH EMPLOYERS’ ASSOCIATION 247 Acting as an Information Resource 248 Focusing on the Added Value of Information 248 Co-Creating Added Value in Interaction with Companies 249 A Final Observation 250 References 250 12 BLINDFOLDED THROUGH THE INFORMATION HURRICANE? A REVIEW OF A MANAGER’S STRATEGY TO COPE WITH THE INFORMATION PARADOX 251 Arjen Verhoeff 12.1 Introduction 252 12.2 Decomposing the Information Paradox 253 12.2.1 The Control of the Internal Information Process 253 12.2.2 The Control of the External Information Process 254 12.3 A Framework to Analyze the Information Paradox 255 12.3.1 Do Managers Experience Issues Regarding Information? 257 12.3.2 Do Managers Use an Information Strategy? 257 12.3.3 Do Managers Use a Strategy to Transform Information into Added Value? 257 12.4 Illustrating the Framework with Some Dutch Empirical Evidence 258 12.4.1 The Importance of an Information Strategy 258 12.4.2 Preliminary Survey Among Dutch Managers 259 12.5 Discussion and Conclusion: Lessons in Information Strategy 260 12.5.1 Discussion 260 12.5.2 Methodological Grounding 261 12.5.3 Learning Points 261 12.5.4 Applied Innovative Directions 262 12.5.5 Toward an Innovative Research Agenda 264 12.5.6 General Conclusion 264 References 265 List of References for Boxed Quotations 267 Author Index 269 Subject Index 275

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book presents recent advances in DSP to simplify, or increase the computational speed of, common signal processing operations. The topics describe clever DSP tricks of the trade not covered in conventional DSP textbooks. This material is practical, real-world, DSP tips and tricks as opposed to the traditional highly-specialized, math-intensive, research subjects directed at industry researchers and university professors. This book goes well beyond the standard DSP fundamentals textbook and presents new, but tried-and-true, clever implementations of digital filter design, spectrum analysis, signal generation, high-speed function approximation, and various other DSP functions.Trade Review“Great tips, tricks of the trade, secrets, practical shortcuts, and clever engineering solutions from seasoned signal processing professionals … Valuable signal processing techniques not taught in engineering schools .” (ITbriefing.net, 2 August 2012) Table of ContentsPreface xi Contributors xiii Part One Efficient Digital Filters 1. Lost Knowledge Refound: Sharpened FIR Filters 3 Matthew Donadio 2. Quantized FIR Filter Design Using Compensating Zeros 11 Amy Bell, Joan Carletta, and Kishore Kotteri 3. Designing Nonstandard Filters with Differential Evolution 25 Rainer Storn 4. Designing IIR Filters with a Given 3 dB Point 33 Ricardo A. Losada and Vincent Pellissier 5. Filtering Tricks for FSK Demodulation 43 David Shiung, Huei-Wen Ferng, and Richard Lyons 6. Reducing CIC Filter Complexity 51 Ricardo A. Losada and Richard Lyons 7. Precise Filter Design 59 Greg Berchin 8. Turbocharging Interpolated FIR Filters 73 Richard Lyons 9. A Most Effi cient Digital Filter: The Two-Path Recursive All-Pass Filter 85 Fred Harris 10. DC Blocker Algorithms 105 Randy Yates and Richard Lyons 11. Precise Variable-Q Filter Design 111 Shlomo Engelberg 12. Improved Narrowband Lowpass IIR Filters in Fixed-Point Systems 117 Richard Lyons 13. Improving FIR Filter Coeffi cient Precision 123 Zhi Shen Part Two Signal and Spectrum Analysis Tricks 14. Fast, Accurate Frequency Estimators 137 Eric Jacobsen, Peter Kootsookos 15. Fast Algorithms for Computing Similarity Measures in Signals 147 James McNames 16. Effi cient Multi-tone Detection 157 Vladimir Vassilevsky 17. Turning Overlap-Save into a Multiband, Mixing, Downsampling Filter Bank 165 Mark Borgerding 18. Sliding Spectrum Analysis 175 Eric Jacobsen and Richard Lyons 19. Recovering Periodically Spaced Missing Samples 189 Andor Bariska 20. Novel Adaptive IIR Filter for Frequency Estimation and Tracking 197 Li Tan and Jean Jiang 21. Accurate, Guaranteed-Stable, Sliding DFT 207 Krzysztof Duda 22. Reducing FFT Scalloping Loss Errors without Multiplication 215 Richard Lyons 23. Slope Filtering: An FIR Approach to Linear Regression 227 Clay S. Turner Part Three Fast Function Approximation Algorithms 24. Another Contender in the Arctangent Race 239 Richard Lyons 25. High-Speed Square Root Algorithms 243 Mark Allie and Richard Lyons 26. Function Approximation Using Polynomials 251 Jyri Ylöstalo 27. Efficient Approximations for the Arctangent Function 265 Sreeraman Rajan, Sichun Wang, Robert Inkol, and Alain Joyal 28. A Differentiator with a Difference 277 Richard Lyons 29. A Fast Binary Logarithm Algorithm 281 Clay S. Turner 30. Multiplier-Free Divide, Square Root, and Log Algorithms 285 François Auger, Bruno Feuvrie, Feng Li, and Zhen Luo 31. A Simple Algorithm for Fitting a Gaussian Function 297 Hongwei Guo 32. Fixed-Point Square Roots Using L-Bit Truncation 307 Abhishek Seth and Woon-Seng Gan Part Four Signal Generation Techniques 33. Recursive Discrete-Time Sinusoidal Oscillators 319 Clay S. Turner 34. Direct Digital Synthesis: A Tool for Periodic Wave Generation 337 Lionel Cordesses 35. Implementing a ΣΔ DAC in Fixed-Point Arithmetic 353 Shlomo Engelberg 36. Effi cient 8-PSK/16-PSK Generation Using Distributed Arithmetic 361 Josep Sala Part Five Assorted High-Performance DSP Techniques 39. Frequency Response Compensation with DSP 397 Laszlo Hars 40. Generating Rectangular Coordinates in Polar Coordinate Order 407 Charles Rader 41. The Swiss Army Knife of Digital Networks 413 Richard Lyons and Amy Bell 42. JPEG2000–Choices and Trade-offs for Encoders 431 Amy Bell and Krishnaraj Varma 43. Using Shift Register Sequences 441 Charles Rader 44. Efficient Resampling Implementations 449 Douglas W. Barker 45. Sampling Rate Conversion in the Frequency Domain 459 Guoan Bi and Sanjit K. Mitra 46. Enhanced-Convergence Normalized LMS Algorithm 469 Maurice Givens Index 475

Read more less

Book SynopsisVIRTUAL EXPERIMENTS in MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS The first book of its kind to explain fundamental concepts in both vibrations and signal processing using MATLAB virtual experiments Students and young engineers with a strong grounding in engineering theory often lack the practical skills and knowledge required to carry out experimental work in the laboratory. Fundamental and time-consuming errors can be avoided with the appropriate training and a solid understanding of basic concepts in vibrations and/or signal processing, which are critical to testing new designs. Virtual Experiments in Mechanical Vibrations: Structural Dynamics and Signal Processing is designed for readers with limited knowledge of vibrations and signal processing. The intention is to help them relate vibration theory to measurements carried out in the laboratory. With a hands-on approach that emphasizes physics rather than mathematics, this practical resource explains fundamental concepts in vibrations and signal processing. It uses the concept of a virtual experiment together with MATLAB to show how the dynamic properties of vibration isolators can be determined, how vibration absorbers can be designed, and how they perform on distributed parameter structures. Readers will find that this text: Allows the concepts of experimental work to be discussed and simulated in the classroom using a physics-based approachPresents computational virtual experiments using MATLAB examples to determine the dynamic behaviour of several common dynamic systemsExplains the rationale of virtual experimentation and describes typical vibration testing setupsIntroduces the signal processing tools needed to determine the frequency response of a system from input and output dataIncludes access to a companion website containing MATLAB code Virtual Experiments in Mechanical Vibrations: Structural Dynamics and Signal Processing is a must-have resource for researchers, mechanical engineers, and advanced undergraduate and graduate students who are new to the subjects of vibrations, signal processing, and vibration testing. It is also an invaluable tool for universities where the possibilities of doing experimental work are limited.Table of ContentsPreface xiii List of Abbreviations xv List of Symbols xvii About the Companion Website xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Typical Laboratory-Based Vibration Tests 3 1.3 Relationship Between the Input and Output for a SISO System 5 1.4 A Virtual Vibration Test 6 1.5 Some Notes on the Book 7 References 7 2 Fundamentals of Vibration 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Basic Concepts – Mass, Stiffness, and Damping 9 2.3 Single Degree-of-Freedom System 11 2.4 Free Vibration 11 2.5 Impulse Response Function (IRF) 13 2.6 Determination of Damping from Free Vibration 17 2.7 Harmonic Excitation 19 2.8 Frequency Response Function (FRF) 22 2.9 Other Features of the Receptance FRF 28 2.10 Determination of Damping from an FRF 29 2.11 Reciprocal FRF 33 2.12 Summary 35 References 37 3 Fourier Analysis 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 The Fourier Transform (FT) 39 3.2.1 Example – SDOF system 44 3.3 The Discrete Time Fourier Transform (DTFT) 45 3.4 The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) 48 3.5 Inverse Fourier Transforms 53 3.6 Summary 57 References 58 4 Numerical Computation of the FRFs and IRFs of an SDOF System 61 4.1 Introduction 61 4.2 Effect of Sampling on the FRFs 61 4.2.1 Receptance 62 4.2.2 Mobility 66 4.2.3 Accelerance 71 4.3 Effect of Data Truncation 77 4.4 Effects of Sampling on the IRFs Calculated Using the IDFT 85 4.5 Summary 91 References 92 5 Vibration Excitation 93 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Vibration Excitation Devices 93 5.2.1 Electrodynamic Shaker 93 5.2.2 Instrumented Impact Hammer 94 5.3 Vibration Excitation Signals 96 5.3.1 Excitation at a Single Frequency 98 5.3.2 Excitation Using a Random Signal 104 5.3.3 Excitation Using a Chirp or Swept Sine 110 5.3.4 Excitation Using a Half-Sine Pulse 113 5.4 Summary 117 References 117 6 Determination of the Vibration Response of a System 119 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Determination of the Vibration Response 119 6.2.1 Convolution in the Time Domain 119 6.2.2 Calculation of the Response via the Frequency Domain 120 6.2.3 Numerical Integration of the Equation of Motion 121 6.3 Calculation of the Vibration Response of an SDOF System 121 6.3.1 Impulsive Force 122 6.3.2 Half-sine Force Impulse 122 6.3.3 Chirp (Swept Sine) Force Input 123 6.3.4 Random Force Input 125 6.4 Summary 129 References 130 7 Frequency Response Function (FRF) Estimation 131 7.1 Introduction 131 7.2 Transient Excitation 131 7.2.1 H1 and H2 Estimators 134 7.2.2 Coherence Function 135 7.2.3 Examples 137 7.3 Random Excitation 144 7.4 Comparison of Excitation Methods and Effects of Shaker–Structure Interaction 151 7.5 Virtual Experiment – Vibration Isolation 157 7.5.1 The Physics of Vibration Isolation 157 7.5.2 Experimental Determination of the Stiffness and Damping of a Vibration Isolator 159 7.5.3 Experiment to Investigate the Trade-off Between Decreasing the Response at the Resonance Frequency and Improving Vibration Isolation 163 7.6 Summary 167 References 168 8 Multi-Degree-of-Freedom (MDOF) Systems: Dynamic Behaviour 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Lumped Parameter MDOF System 169 8.2.1 Example – 3DOF System 170 8.2.2 Free Vibration 175 8.2.3 Resonance and Anti-resonance Frequencies 177 8.2.4 Modal Decomposition 181 8.2.5 Impulse Response Function (IRF) 188 8.3 Continuous Systems 193 8.3.1 Rod 193 8.3.1.1 Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 195 8.3.1.2 Impulse Response Function (IRF) 197 8.3.2 Beam 201 8.3.2.1 Natural Frequencies and Mode Shapes 202 8.3.2.2 Impulse Response Function (IRF) 203 8.4 Summary 210 References 213 9 Multi-Degree-of-Freedom (MDOF) Systems: Virtual Experiments 215 9.1 Introduction 215 9.2 Two Degree-of-Freedom System: FRF Estimation 215 9.2.1 Determination of a Modal Model 220 9.3 Beam: FRF Estimation 223 9.3.1 Determination of a Modal Model 229 9.4 The Vibration Absorber as a Vibration Control Device 234 9.4.1 Theory 234 9.4.2 Effect of a Vibration Absorber on an SDOF System 235 9.4.3 Vibration Absorber Attached to an SDOF System – Virtual Experiment 237 9.4.4 Vibration Absorber Attached to a Cantilever Beam – Virtual Experiment 251 9.5 Summary 256 References 258 Appendix A Numerical Differentiation and Integration 259 A.1 Differentiation in the Time Domain 259 A.2 Integration in the Time Domain 260 A.3 Differentiation and Integration in the Frequency Domain 262 Reference 262 Appendix B The Hilbert Transform 263 References 265 Appendix C The Decibel: A Brief Description 267 Reference 268 Appendix D Numerical Integration of Equations of Motion 269 D.1 Euler’s Method 269 D.2 The Runge–Kutta Method 271 References 273 Appendix E The Delta Function 275 E.1 Properties of the Delta Function 276 E.2 Fourier Series Representation of a Train of Delta Functions 277 Reference 277 Appendix F Aliasing 279 References 285 Appendix G Convolution 287 G.1 Relationship Between Convolution and Multiplication 291 G.2 Circular Convolution 296 References 299 Appendix H Some Influential Scientists in Topics Related to This Book 301 Index 307

Read more less

Book SynopsisCombines both the DSP principles and real-time implementations and applications, and now updated with the new eZdsp USB Stick, which is very low cost, portable and widely employed at many DSP labs. Real-Time Digital Signal Processing introduces fundamental digital signal processing (DSP) principles and will be updated to include the latest DSP applications, introduce new software development tools and adjust the software design process to reflect the latest advances in the field. In the 3rd edition of the book, the key aspect of hands-on experiments will be enhanced to make the DSP principles more interesting and directly interact with the real-world applications. All of the programs will be carefully updated using the most recent version of software development tools and the new TMS320VC5505 eZdsp USB Stick for real-time experiments. Due to its lower cost and portability, the new software and hardware tools are now widely used in university laTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xix 1 Introduction to Real-Time Digital Signal Processing 1 1.1 Basic Elements of Real-Time DSP Systems 2 1.2 Analog Interface 3 1.3 DSP Hardware 10 1.4 DSP System Design 16 1.5 Experiments and Program Examples 21 Exercises 42 References 43 2 DSP Fundamentals and Implementation Considerations 44 2.1 Digital Signals and Systems 44 2.2 System Concepts 48 2.3 Introduction to Random Variables 66 2.4 Fixed-Point Representations and Quantization Effects 72 2.5 Overflow and Solutions 81 2.6 Experiments and Program Examples 83 Exercises 99 References 101 3 Design and Implementation of FIR Filters 102 3.1 Introduction to FIR Filters 102 3.2 Design of FIR Filters 114 3.3 Implementation Considerations 125 3.4 Applications: Interpolation and Decimation Filters 130 3.5 Experiments and Program Examples 135 Exercises 144 References 147 4 Design and Implementation of IIR Filters 148 4.1 Introduction 148 4.2 Design of IIR Filters 154 4.3 Realization of IIR Filters 158 4.4 Design of IIR Filters Using MATLAB1 164 4.5 Implementation Considerations 168 4.6 Practical Applications 174 4.7 Experiments and Program Examples 179 Exercises 191 References 194 5 Frequency Analysis and the Discrete Fourier Transform 195 5.1 Fourier Series and Fourier Transform 195 5.2 Discrete Fourier Transform 198 5.3 Fast Fourier Transforms 205 5.4 Implementation Considerations 210 5.5 Practical Applications 214 5.6 Experiments and Program Examples 224 Exercises 236 References 238 6 Adaptive Filtering 239 6.1 Introduction to Random Processes 239 6.2 Adaptive Filters 243 6.3 Performance Analysis 252 6.4 Implementation Considerations 255 6.5 Practical Applications 259 6.6 Experiments and Program Examples 268 Exercises 280 References 282 7 Digital Signal Generation and Detection 283 7.1 Sine Wave Generators 283 7.2 Noise Generators 288 7.3 DTMF Generation and Detection 291 7.4 Experiments and Program Examples 298 Exercises 302 References 302 8 Adaptive Echo Cancellation 304 8.1 Introduction to Line Echoes 304 8.2 Adaptive Line Echo Canceler 306 8.3 Practical Considerations 309 8.4 Double-Talk Effects and Solutions 312 8.5 Nonlinear Processor 314 8.6 Adaptive Acoustic Echo Cancellation 315 8.7 Experiments and Program Examples 323 Exercises 328 References 329 9 Speech Signal Processing 330 9.1 Speech Coding Techniques 330 9.2 Speech Enhancement 350 9.3 VoIP Applications 355 9.4 Experiments and Program Examples 360 Exercises 374 References 375 10 Audio Signal Processing 377 10.1 Introduction 377 10.2 Audio Coding 378 10.3 Audio Equalizers 389 10.4 Audio Effects 397 10.5 Experiments and Program Examples 411 Exercises 427 References 428 11 Introduction to Digital Image Processing 430 11.1 Digital Images and Systems 430 11.2 Color Spaces 432 11.3 YCbCr Sub-sampled Color Space 433 11.4 Color Balance and Correction 434 11.5 Histogram Equalization 437 11.6 Image Filtering 440 11.7 Fast Convolution 448 11.8 Practical Applications 452 11.9 Experiments and Program Examples 461 Exercises 474 References 475 Appendix A Some Useful Formulas and Definitions 477 Appendix B Software Organization and List of Experiments 484 Appendix C Introduction to the TMS320C55xx Digital Signal Processor 490 References 535 Index 537

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on basic skills and tips for career enhancement, Engineer Your Own Success is a guide to improving efficiency and performance in any engineering field. It imparts valuable organization tips, communication advice, networking tactics, and practical assistance for preparing for the PE examevery necessary skill for success. Authored by a highly renowned career coach, this book is a battle plan for climbing the rungs of any engineering ladder.Table of ContentsA Note From The Series Editor xiii Acknowledgments xv Foreword xvii Preface xix Introduction: Use This Book Strategically 1 PART I YOUR GUIDE TO ENGINEERING A SUCCESSFUL JOB SEARCH 3 1 Building a Winning Résumé 5 1.1 Building a Winning Résumé (Online and Offline) 5 1.2 There Is One Key Factor to a Great Résumé 6 1.3 The Importance of Customizing Your Résumé 6 1.4 There Is a Formula to Building a Winning Résumé 7 1.5 Determining the Proper Length of a Résumé 8 1.6 Effectively Show Non-engineering Experience on Your Résumé 12 1.7 The Importance of Honesty During the Interview Process 13 1.8 Seven Steps to Creating a LinkedIn Profile That Can Land a Job 14 1.9 Your LinkedIn Profile and Your Résumé Should Be Perfect Professional Snapshots 16 1.10 Key Points to Remember 18 2 Landing and Acing an Engineering Job Interview 19 2.1 Leverage LinkedIn Groups to Land a Job Interview 19 2.2 Understanding Prospective Employers and Their Needs 20 2.3 Interview Research and Preparation 22 2.4 Interview Etiquette and Attire 23 2.5 Performing During the Actual Interview 24 2.6 The Follow-Up to the Interview 25 2.7 Jobs Can Affect Your PE License 26 2.8 Key Points to Remember 26 Part II THE 7 KEY ELEMENTS TO AN EXTRAORDINARY ENGINEERING CAREER 29 3 Career Goals Act as Your Destination 31 3.1 Career Goals Act as Your Destination 31 3.2 Start by Defining “Success” 32 3.3 Define Your Values 33 3.4 Ask Yourself Where Why What How and Who 34 3.5 More on Why 35 3.6 Think Big and Then Think BIGGER! 36 3.7 Formulate and Prioritize Your Goals 37 3.8 Be SMART and Use Small Steps for Big Results 37 3.9 Let Your Definition of Success Guide You 40 3.10 Motivate Yourself to Pursue Your Goals 41 3.11 Time to Celebrate! 42 3.12 Key Points to Remember 42 4 Obtain Credentials That Will Help You to Reach Your Goals 45 4.1 Credentials Bring You Credibility 45 4.2 Set Yourself Apart from Others 46 4.3 Recognizing the Difference between Patience and Procrastination 47 4.4 Exam Preparation: Start With the End in Mind 48 4.5 Tips for Approaching the PE Exam 49 4.5.1 Take the Fundamentals of Engineering Exam as Soon as Possible 49 4.5.2 Start the PE Exam Application Process as Early as Possible 50 4.5.3 Submit the Application as Soon as Possible 51 4.5.4 Don’t Take the Exam Just to See What It Contains 51 4.5.5 Take a Review Course Whether You Want to or Not 52 4.5.6 Ask Others What Worked for Them 52 4.5.7 Bring the Right Materials to the Exam 53 4.5.8 The Day of the Exam 54 4.5.9 The Day After the Exam 55 4.5.10 Credentialing Processes around the World 55 4.6 If You Fall Off the Horse Get Right Back On 55 4.7 Master’s in Engineering or Business Administration? 56 4.8 Awards Are Underrated 58 4.9 Take Advantage of Company Benefits 58 4.10 Key Points to Remember 59 5 Find and Become a Mentor 61 5.1 The Many Faces of a Mentor 61 5.2 Finding a Mentoring Program and Selecting the Right Mentor 62 5.2.1 Try to Select Someone from Your Specific Discipline 63 5.2.2 Consider Your Level of Comfort 64 5.2.3 Don’t Settle on the First One That Comes Along 64 5.3 The Mentoring Relationship for Protégés 64 5.3.1 Establish Levels of Confidentiality 65 5.3.2 Set Expectations for Mutual Accountability 65 5.4 The Importance of Accountability 66 5.5 Getting the Most from Your Mentor 67 5.6 Become a Mentor 67 5.7 Selecting the Right Protégé 68 5.8 Being the Best Mentor You Can Be 69 5.9 How to Graciously End a Mentoring Relationship 70 5.10 Actions to Avoid for Mentors and Protégés 71 5.11 Key Points to Remember 71 6 Become a Great Communicator 73 6.1 In Today’s World Communication Is a Whole Different Ball Game 73 6.2 Project/Team Communication Starts In House 74 6.3 Communicate Early and Often 75 6.4 How to (Almost) Explain Rocket Science to a Nontechnical Person 76 6.5 Honesty Really Is the Best Policy 77 6.6 How You Say Something Is Just as Important as What You Say 79 6.7 Public Speaking: The Ultimate Differentiator 80 6.8 How to Improve Your Public Speaking Skills 82 6.9 Confidence Encourages Communication 84 6.10 Sometimes Listening Is the Most Powerful Form of Communication 85 6.11 Responsiveness Impacts Reputation 86 6.12 Key Points to Remember 87 7 The Ability to Network 89 7.1 What Is Networking and Why Is It Important? 89 7.2 Secrets to Building Lasting Relationships 90 7.2.1 Their Interests Should Interest You 91 7.2.2 Listen to Others 91 7.2.3 Relationship Value Is a Two-Way Street 92 7.3 Network in Your Industry through Professional Societies and Organizations 92 7.4 Finding and Developing Project Leads Gets You Noticed 94 7.5 Opportunities Have No Limits 96 7.6 You Are Never Too Young (or Old!) to Network 97 7.7 Overcoming Low Confidence and Language Barriers 98 7.8 How to Deal with a Boss or Supervisor Who Is Holding You Back 99 7.9 Interoffice Politics and Workplace Relationships 101 7.10 Monitoring and Controlling Your Professional Image in Social Networking 102 7.10.1 Controlling Your Facebook Twitter and Google+ Messaging 102 7.10.2 Maximizing LinkedIn 103 7.11 Key Points to Remember 104 8 Stay Focused Organized Productive and Stress-Free 107 8.1 The Three Rules to Time Management and Work–Family Balance 107 8.2 Rule #1: Be Organized in All of Your Efforts 108 8.2.1 Deploy a Minimalist Mind-Set 109 8.2.2 Use the Old (and New) Trusty Notepad 110 8.2.3 Manage the Never-Ending Pile of Business Cards 112 8.2.4 Remember That Missed Appointments Equal Missed Opportunities 114 8.2.4.1 Use Your Calendar Religiously 114 8.2.4.2 Fill in All Pertinent Information 114 8.2.4.3 Confirm All Meetings 115 8.2.5 Avoid the “I Am Not Sure What Color My Desk Is” Syndrome 115 8.2.6 Prepare for Your Annual Performance Review 116 8.3 Rule #2: Stay Focused and Productive 118 8.3.1 Create Consistency through Routines 118 8.3.2 Establish Your Most Important Tasks Early Each Day 119 8.3.3 Complete or Assign Your MITs First Thing Each Day 120 8.3.4 Control Your Own Schedule by Breaking Bad E-Mail Habits 121 8.3.5 Slow Things Down through Meditation 123 8.3.6 Focus Intently on What You Are Doing 123 8.4 Rule #3: Avoid Stress and Worry at All Costs 124 8.4.1 Simplification through Elimination 125 8.4.2 Empty Your E-Mail Inbox Twice per Day 125 8.4.3 A Good To-Do List Can Work Wonders 126 8.4.4 Keep Your Body (and Mind) in Shape 128 8.4.5 Eat and Sleep Well 129 8.5 Work–Family Balance Is Achievable 130 8.5.1 Define Work–Family Balance 130 8.5.2 Build Flexibility into Your Career 131 8.5.3 Be Present in the Moment 132 8.6 Key Points to Remember 133 9 Be a Leader Every Day 135 9.1 You Are a Leader 135 9.2 The Power of Positivity 136 9.3 Great Leaders See Only Opportunity 137 9.4 Understanding Your Role 139 9.5 Delegate Delegate and Then Delegate Some More 140 9.6 Earn the Trust and Respect of Your Team 142 9.7 There Is No “I” in Team 143 9.8 Key Points to Remember 144 10 The Time Is Now: Take Action 147 10.1 The Time Is Now 147 10.2 Do Not Settle for Less 148 10.3 You Must Make Time for Your Own Development 148 10.4 Think Like an Entrepreneur in Your Career 149 10.5 Take Action 150 10.6 Key Points to Remember 150 11 Tools and Templates for Setting and Achieving Your Career Goals 153 11.1 Template for a Winning Résumé 154 11.2 Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your Values 155 11.3A Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in One Year 155 11.3B Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in Two Years 156 11.3C Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in Five Years 157 11.4 Action Exercise Worksheet—Formulate and Prioritize Goals 158 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #1 158 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #2 159 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #3 160 11.6 Action Exercise Worksheet 161 11.7 Action Exercise Worksheet 162 11.8 Action Exercise Worksheet 163 12 Engineering Your Own Success Stories from Practicing Engineers 165 12.1 Planning to Be an Extraordinary Engineer 165 12.2 Realizing a Dream of Becoming a Structural Engineer 166 12.3 A Big Step Forward for an Aspiring World-Class Engineer 167 12.4 A Boost of Confidence to Spur Maximum Potential 168 12.5 The Push Needed to Take Action 169 12.6 I Decided to Start Planning for Me in My Career 170 13 The Best of the Blog 171 13.1 What Is Your Ultimate Career Goal? (September 10 2010) 171 13.2 From Design Engineer to Manager in 2012: You Can Do It! (January 4 2012) 172 13.3 Twelve Rules of Zen Monks That May Help You Reduce Stress and Improve Quality in Your Engineering Career (June 5 2012) 174 13.4 It’s My Birthday! Who I Am Away from Work and Important Lessons That I Have Learned (August 26 2012) 176 13.5 What to Do in Your Engineering Career When You Don’t Know What to Do (May 30 2013) 178 13.6 Preparation Is Key to Engineering Balance in Your Career and Life (July 25 2013) 179 13.7 Six Ways to Reinvigorate Your Engineering Career Development (July 31 2013) 181 13.8 The Only Stability You Have in Your Engineering Career Is You (September 24 2013) 182 13.9 Be Cautious Even When You Find One of the Highest-Paying Engineering Jobs (August 15 2013) 184 13.10 If You Set Lofty Goals You Will Engineer Their Reality (October 22 2013) 185 13.11 Seven Keys to Success for Engineers and Alaskan Sled Dogs (November 14 2013) 187 13.12 Do All Engineers Need to Check Things Off to Feel Productive? (December 11 2013) 188 13.13 How to Not Mess Up Your Annual Review for Engineers (December 24 2013) 189 13.14 Three Steps to Becoming a Partner in an Engineering Firm Directly from an Engineering Partner (February 5 2014) 191 Appendix: Recommended Reading 193 About the Author 199 Index 201

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis extensively updated second edition of LTE Signaling, Troubleshooting and Performance Measurement describes the LTE signaling protocols and procedures for the third generation of mobile communications and beyond. It is one of the few books available that explain the LTE signaling messages, procedures and measurements down to the bit & byte level, and all trace examples are taken for a real lab and field trial traces. This book covers the crucial key performance indicators (KPI) to be measured during field trials and deployment phase of new LTE networks. It describes how statistic values can be aggregated and evaluated, and how the network can be optimized during the first stages of deployment, using dedicated examples to enhance understanding. Written by experts in the field of mobile communications, this book systematically describes the most recent LTE signaling procedures, explaining how to identify and troubleshoot abnormal network behavior and common failure cTable of ContentsForeword xi Acknowledgements xiii 1 Standards, Protocols, and Functions 1 1.1 LTE Standards and Standard Roadmap 2 1.2 LTE Radio Access Network Architecture 9 1.3 Network Elements and Functions 10 1.3.1 The eNodeB (eNB) 11 1.3.2 Mobility Management Entity (MME) 12 1.3.3 Serving Gateway (S-GW) 12 1.3.4 Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN-GW) 13 1.3.5 Interfaces and Reference Points 13 1.4 Area and Subscriber Identities 18 1.4.1 Domains and Strati 18 1.4.2 IMSI 19 1.4.3 LMSI, TMSI, P-TMSI, M-TMSI, and S-TMSI 20 1.4.4 GUTI 21 1.4.5 IMEI 22 1.4.6 RNTI 22 1.4.7 Location Area, Routing Area, Service Area, Tracking Area, and Cell Global Identity 24 1.4.8 Mapping between Temporary and Area Identities for EUTRAN and UTRAN/GERAN-Based Systems 25 1.4.9 GSM Base Station Identification 27 1.4.10 UTRA Base Station Identification 28 1.4.11 Numbering, Addressing, and Identification in the Session Initiation Protocol 29 1.4.12 Access Point Name 30 1.5 User Equipment 30 1.5.1 UE Categories 31 1.6 QoS Architecture 32 1.7 LTE Security 34 1.8 Radio Interface Basics 38 1.8.1 Duplex Methods 40 1.8.2 Multiple Access Methods 42 1.8.3 OFDM Principles and Modulation 46 1.8.4 Multiple Access in OFDM–OFDMA 48 1.8.5 Resource Blocks 49 1.8.6 Downlink Slot Structure 53 1.8.7 OFDM Scheduling on LTE DL 56 1.8.8 SC-FDMA Principles and Modulation 60 1.8.9 Scheduling on LTE UL 62 1.8.10 Uplink Slot Structure 64 1.8.11 Link Adaptation in LTE 64 1.8.12 Physical Channels in LTE 70 1.8.13 Transport Channels in LTE 79 1.8.14 Channel Mapping and Multiplexing 80 1.8.15 Initial UE Radio Access 82 1.8.16 UE Random Access 82 1.9 Hybrid ARQ 87 1.9.1 Synchronous HARQ in LTE Uplink 90 1.9.2 Asynchronous HARQ in LTE Downlink 91 1.9.3 HARQ Example 92 1.10 LTE Advanced 94 1.10.1 Increasing Spectral Efficiency 95 1.10.2 Carrier Aggregation 95 1.10.3 Heterogeneous Networks 95 1.10.4 Inter-Cell Interference Coordination 97 1.11 LTE Network Protocol Architecture 98 1.11.1 Uu–Control/User Plane 98 1.11.2 S1–Control/User Plane 99 1.11.3 X2–User/Control Plane 100 1.11.4 S6a–Control Plane 100 1.11.5 S3/S4/S5/S8/S10/S11–Control Plane/User Plane 101 1.12 Protocol Functions, Encoding, Basic Messages, and Information Elements 102 1.12.1 Ethernet 102 1.12.2 Internet Protocol (IPv4/IPv6) 102 1.12.3 Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) 106 1.12.4 Radio Interface Layer 2 Protocols 108 1.12.5 Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol 110 1.12.6 Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol 111 1.12.7 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) 115 1.12.8 Radio Resource Control (RRC) Protocol 117 1.12.9 Non-Access Stratum (NAS) Protocol 124 1.12.10 S1 Application Part (S1AP) 124 1.12.11 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) 128 1.12.12 GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP) 129 1.12.13 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) 136 1.12.14 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) 138 1.12.15 DIAMETER on EPC Interfaces 139 2 E-UTRAN/EPC Signaling 145 2.1 S1 Setup 145 2.1.1 S1 Setup: Message Flow 145 2.1.2 S1 Setup: Failure Analysis 147 2.2 Initial Attach 149 2.2.1 Procedure 150 2.3 UE Context Release Requested by eNodeB 166 2.3.1 Procedure 166 2.4 UE Service Request 168 2.4.1 Procedure 169 2.5 Dedicated Bearer Setup 172 2.6 Inter-eNodeB Handover over X2 174 2.6.1 Procedure 176 2.7 S1 Handover 186 2.7.1 Procedure 188 2.8 Dedicated Bearer Release 199 2.9 Detach 200 2.9.1 Procedure 200 2.10 Failure Cases in E-UTRAN and EPC 203 2.11 Voice over LTE (SIP) Call–Complete Scenario 203 2.12 Inter-RAT Cell Reselection 4G-3G-4G 210 2.13 Normal/Periodical Tracking Area Update 211 2.14 CS Fallback End-to-End S1/IuCS/IuPS 212 2.15 Paging 213 2.16 Multi-E-RAB Call Scenarios 214 2.16.1 Multi-E-RAB Call Scenarios without Subscriber Mobility 214 2.16.2 Multi-E-RAB Call with Intra-LTE Handover 215 2.16.3 Inter-RAT Mobility of a Multi-E-RAB Call Using CS Fallback 216 2.16.4 Abnormal Releases of Calls with VoLTE Services 217 3 Radio Interface Signaling Procedures 219 3.1 RRC Connection Setup, Attach, and Default Bearer Setup 220 3.1.1 Random Access and RRC Connection Setup Procedure 220 3.1.2 RRC Connection Reconfiguration and Default Bearer Setup 229 3.1.3 RRC Connection Release 238 3.2 LTE Mobility 238 3.2.1 Intra-eNB Intra-Frequency HO 242 3.2.2 Intra-eNodeB Inter-Frequency Handover 243 3.2.3 Inter-eNodeB Intra-Frequency Handover 248 3.2.4 Inter-RAT Handover to 3G 253 3.2.5 Inter-RAT Handover to 2G 255 3.2.6 Inter-RAT Blind Redirection to 3G 257 3.2.7 Inter-RAT Blind Redirection to 2G 259 3.2.8 CS Fallback 260 3.3 Failure Cases 262 4 Key Performance Indicators and Measurements for LTE Radio Network Optimization 267 4.1 Monitoring Solutions for LTE Interfaces 267 4.1.1 Monitoring the Air Interface (Uu) 267 4.1.2 Antenna-Based Monitoring 269 4.1.3 Coax-Based Monitoring 270 4.1.4 CPRI-Based Monitoring 270 4.1.5 Monitoring the E-UTRAN Line Interface 272 4.1.6 Monitoring the eNodeB Trace Port 276 4.2 Monitoring the Scheduler Efficiency 279 4.2.1 UL and DL Scheduling Resources 285 4.2.2 X2 Load Indication 286 4.2.3 The eNodeB Layer 2 Measurements 288 4.3 Radio Quality Measurements 290 4.3.1 UE Measurements 293 4.3.2 The eNodeB Physical Layer Measurements 297 4.3.3 Radio Interface Tester Measurements 301 4.3.4 I/Q Constellation Diagrams 302 4.3.5 EVM/Modulation Error Ratio 304 4.4 Control Plane Performance Counters and Delay Measurements 306 4.4.1 Network Accessibility 307 4.4.2 Network Retainability 316 4.4.3 Mobility (Handover) 318 4.5 User Plane KPIs 322 4.5.1 IP Throughput 323 4.5.2 Application Throughput 325 4.5.3 TCP Startup KPIs 327 4.5.4 TCP Round-Trip Time 328 4.5.5 Packet Jitter 329 4.5.6 Packet Delay and Packet Loss on a Hop-to-Hop Basis 330 4.6 KPI Visualization using Geographical Maps (Geolocation) 331 4.6.1 The Minimize Drive Test Feature Set of 3GPP 333 Acronyms 337 Bibliography 343 Index 345

Read more less

Book SynopsisDevelop the skills you need to design and build a reliable, cost-effective cabling infrastructure Fully updated for the growing demand of fiber optics for large-scale communications networks and telecommunication standards, this new edition is organized into two parts.Table of ContentsIntroduction xxxiii Part I LAN Networks and Cabling Systems 1 Chapter 1 Introduction to Data Cabling 3 Chapter 2 Cabling Specifications and Standards 57 Chapter 3 Choosing the Correct Cabling 103 Chapter 4 Cable System and Infrastructure Constraints 133 Chapter 5 Cabling System Components 157 Chapter 6 Tools of the Trade 183 Chapter 7 Copper Cable Media 215 Chapter 8 Fiber-Optic Media 255 Chapter 9 Wall Plates 281 Chapter 10 Connectors 299 Chapter 11 Network Equipment 325 Chapter 12 Wireless Networks 343 Chapter 13 Cabling System Design and Installation 367 Chapter 14 Cable Connector Installation 401 Chapter 15 Cable System Testing and Troubleshooting 433 Chapter 16 Creating a Request for Proposal 467 Chapter 17 Cabling @ Work: Experience from the Field 493 Part II Fiber-Optic Cabling and Components 507 Chapter 18 History of Fiber Optics and Broadband Access 509 Chapter 19 Principles of Fiber-Optic Transmission 519 Chapter 20 Basic Principles of Light 539 Chapter 21 Optical Fiber Construction and Theory 555 Chapter 23 Safety 605 Chapter 24 Fiber-Optic Cables 621 Chapter 25 Splicing 653 Chapter 26 Connectors 693 Chapter 27 Fiber-Optic Light Sources and Transmitters 763 Chapter 28 Fiber-Optic Detectors and Receivers 793 Chapter 29 Passive Components and Multiplexers 819 Chapter 30 Passive Optical Networks 849 Chapter 31 Cable Installation and Hardware 869 Chapter 32 Fiber-Optic System Design Considerations 903 Chapter 33 Test Equipment and Link/Cable Testing 941 Chapter 34 Troubleshooting and Restoration 995 Appendices 1037 Appendix A The Bottom Line 1039 Appendix B Cabling Resources 1097 Appendix C Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) Certification 1103 Appendix D Home Cabling: Wiring Your Home for Now and the Future 1109 Appendix E Overview of IEEE 1394 and USB Networking 1115 Appendix F The Electronics Technicians Association, International (ETA) Certifications 1121 Glossary Index 1241

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents recent progress in low-profile natural and metamaterial antennas This book presents the full range of low-profile antennas that use novel elements and take advantage of new concepts in antenna implementation, including metamaterials. Typically formed by constructing lattices of simple elements, metamaterials possess electromagnetic properties not found in naturally occurring materials, and show great promise in a number of low-profile antenna implementations. Introductory chapters define various natural and metamaterial-based antennas and provide the fundamentals of writing computer programs based on the method of moments (MoM) and the finite-difference time-domain method (FDTDM). Chapters then discuss low-profile natural antennas classified into base station antennas, mobile card antennas, beam-forming antennas, and satellite-satellite and earth-satellite communications antennas. Final chapters look at various properties of low-profile metamaterial-based anteTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xv Part I Introduction 1 1. Categorization of Natural Materials and Metamaterials 3 1.1 Natural and Metamaterial Antennas Discussed in This Book 3 1.2 Some Antenna Examples 6 References 8 2. Integral Equations and Method of Moments 11 2.1 Basic Antenna Characteristics 11 2.2 Integral Equation on a Straight-Wire Antenna 15 2.3 Method of Moments 16 2.4 Integral Equation for an Arbitrarily Shaped Wire Antenna in Free Space 19 2.5 Point-Matching Technique 22 2.6 Integral Equation N1 for an Arbitrarily Shaped Wire Antenna: Closed Kernel Expression 23 2.7 Integral Equations N2 and N3 for an Antenna System Composed of an Arbitrarily Shaped Wire and an Arbitrarily Shaped Aperture and Their MoM Transformation 27 2.8 Integral Equation N4 for an Arbitrarily Shaped Wire Antenna on a Dielectric Substrate Backed by a Conducting Plane and Its MoM Transformation 34 2.9 Integral Equation N5 for an Arbitrarily Shaped Wire Antenna on a Dielectric Half-Space and Its Transformation Using a Finite-Difference Technique 41 References 46 3. Finite-Difference Time-Domain Methods (FDTDMs) 49 3.1 Basis 49 3.2 LOD–FDTD Method 52 References 57 Part II Low-Profile Natural Antennas 59 Part II-1 Base Station Antennas 61 4. Inverted-F Antennas 63 4.1 Inverted-F Antenna with a Single Parasitic Inverted-L Element 63 4.2 Inverted-F Antenna with a Pair of Parasitic Inverted-L Elements 67 References 73 5. Multiloop Antennas 75 5.1 Discrete Multiloop (ML) Antennas 75 5.2 Modified Multiloop Antennas 78 5.3 Plate-Loop (PL) Antenna 82 References 83 6. Fan-Shaped Antenna 85 6.1 Wideband Input Impedance 85 6.2 Characteristics of The Fan-Shaped Antenna 86 6.3 Cross Fan-Shaped Antenna (X-Fan Antenna) 87 6.4 Cross Fan-Shaped Antenna Surrounded By a Wire (X-Fan-W) 89 6.5 Cross Fan-Shaped Antenna with Slots (X-Fan-S) 92 References 93 7. BOR–SPR Antenna 95 7.1 Configuration 95 7.2 Antenna Input Characteristics of Initial Patch, Patch-Slot, and PSP Antennas 97 7.3 Replacement of The Patch Island with a Conducting Body of Revolution (BOR) 99 References 103 Part II-2 Card Antennas for Mobile Equipment 105 8. Inverted LFL Antenna for Dual-Band Operation 107 8.1 Configuration 107 8.2 Design 107 References 114 9. Fan-Shaped Card Antenna 117 9.1 Configuration 117 9.2 Antenna Characteristics 118 References 123 10. Planar Monopole Card Antenna 125 10.1 Ant-1 and Ant-2 125 10.2 Ant-3 and Ant-4 127 References 131 Part II-3 Beam forming Antennas 133 11. Inverted-F Antenna Above an Electromagnetic Band-Gap Reflector 135 11.1 Inverted-F Array with an EBG Reflector (EBG-InvF Array) 135 11.2 Antenna Characteristics 136 References 140 12. Reconfigurable Bent Two-Leaf and Four-Leaf Antennas 143 12.1 BeToL Antenna 143 12.2 BeFoL Antenna 153 References 160 13. Patch Antenna with a Nonuniform Loop Plate 163 13.1 Antenna System 163 13.2 Reference Gain and Broadside Radiation—Placement of a Homogeneneous PerioAEs Plate 166 13.3 Gradation Constant and Tilted Radiation Beam—Placement of a Nonhomogeneous PerioAEs Plate 168 13.4 Gain 170 References 173 14. Linearly Polarized Rhombic Grid Array Antenna 175 14.1 Configuration 175 14.2 Radiation Pattern and Gain 177 14.3 VSWR Characteristic 183 References 183 15. Circularly Polarized Grid Array Antenna 185 15.1 Configuration of a Prototype Loop-Based CP GAAEDG 185 15.2 Radiation Characteristics of The Prototype Loop-Based CP GAAEDG 188 15.3 Configuration of an Advanced Loop-Based CP GAAEDG 191 15.4 Radiation Characteristics of The Advanced Loop-Based CP GAAEDG 192 References 198 Part II-4 Earth–Satellite and Satellite–Satellite Communications Antennas 199 16. Monofilar Spiral Antenna Array 201 16.1 Tilted-Beam Monofilar Spiral Antenna 201 16.2 Tilted CP Fan Beam 206 References 209 17. Low-Profile Helical Antenna Array 211 17.1 Array Element 211 17.2 Array Antenna 213 17.3 Application Examples 219 References 221 18. Curl Antennas 223 18.1 High-Gain Normal-Beam Array Antenna Composed of Internal-Excitation Curl Elements 223 18.2 High-Gain Tilted-Beam Array Antenna Composed of External-Excitation Curl Elements 229 References 236 Part III Low-Profile Metamaterial Antennas 237 19. Metaline Antenna 239 19.1 Unit Cell 239 19.2 Natural Characteristic Impedance ZNTR, Bloch Impedance ZB, and Phase Constant β 240 19.3 Two-Metaline Antennas 243 References 246 20. Metaloop Antenna for Linearly Polarized Radiation 247 20.1 Metaloop Configuration 247 20.2 Single- and Dual-Peak Beams 249 References 253 21. Circularly Polarized Metaloop Antenna 255 21.1 Configuration 255 21.2 Counter-CP Radiation 255 References 260 22. Metaspiral Antenna 261 22.1 Circularly Polarized Radiation 261 22.2 Linearly Polarized Radiation 266 References 271 23. Metahelical Antennas 273 23.1 Round Metahelical Antenna 273 23.2 Rectangular Metahelical Antenna 276 References 282 Index 283

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes the concept of a Software Defined Mobile Network (SDMN), which will impact the network architecture of current LTE (3GPP) networks. SDN will also open up new opportunities for traffic, resource and mobility management, as well as impose new challenges on network security. Therefore, the book addresses the main affected areas such as traffic, resource and mobility management, virtualized traffics transportation, network management, network security and techno economic concepts. Moreover, a complete introduction to SDN and SDMN concepts. Furthermore, the reader will be introduced to cutting-edge knowledge in areas such as network virtualization, as well as SDN concepts relevant to next generation mobile networks. Finally, by the end of the book the reader will be familiar with the feasibility and opportunities of SDMN concepts, and will be able to evaluate the limits of performance and scalability of these new technologies while applying them to mobile broadb and netwTable of ContentsEditors xv Contributors xvii Foreword xxvii Ulf Ewaldsson Foreword xxix Lauri Oksanen Preface xxxi Acknowledgments xxxvii Abbreviations xxxix Part I Introduction 1 Overview 3Madhusanka Liyanage, Mika Ylianttila, and Andrei Gurtov 1.1 Present Mobile Networks and Their Limitations 4 1.2 Software Defined Mobile Network 5 1.3 Key Benefits of SDMN 7 1.4 Conclusion 9 References 9 2 Mobile Network History 11Brian Brown, Rob Gonzalez, and Brian Stanford 2.1 Overview 11 2.2 The Evolution of the Mobile Network 12 2.2.1 Sharing Resources 13 2.2.2 Orchestration 14 2.2.3 Scalability 15 2.3 Limitations and Challenges in Current Mobile Networks 15 2.4 Requirement in Future Mobile Networks 18 Reference 19 3 Software Defined Networking Concepts 21Xenofon Foukas, Mahesh K. Marina, and Kimon Kontovasilis 3.1 Introduction 21 3.2 SDN History and Evolution 23 3.2.1 Early History of Programmable Networks 23 3.2.2 Evolution of Programmable Networks to SDN 25 3.3 SDN Paradigm and Applications 28 3.3.1 Overview of SDN Building Blocks 28 3.3.2 SDN Switches 30 3.3.3 SDN Controllers 31 3.3.4 SDN Programming Interfaces 34 3.3.5 SDN Application Domains 37 3.3.6 Relation of SDN to Network Virtualization and Network Function Virtualization 38 3.4 Impact of SDN to Research and Industry 39 3.4.1 Overview of Standardization Activities and SDN Summits 40 3.4.2 SDN in the Industry 41 3.4.3 Future of SDN 41 References 42 4 Wireless Software Defined Networking 45Claude Chaudet and Yoram Haddad 4.1 Introduction 45 4.2 SDN for Wireless 47 4.2.1 Implementations: OpenRoads and OpenRadio 49 4.2.2 SDR versus SDN 50 4.3 Related Works 50 4.4 Wireless SDN Opportunities 51 4.4.1 Multinetwork Planning 51 4.4.2 Handovers and Off]Loading 53 4.4.3 Dead Zone Coverage 55 4.4.4 Security 55 4.4.5 CDN and Caching 56 4.5 Wireless SDN Challenges 56 4.5.1 Slice Isolation 56 4.5.2 Topology Discovery and Topology]Related Problems 56 4.5.3 Resource Evaluation and Reporting 57 4.5.4 User and Operator Preferences 57 4.5.5 Nontechnical Aspects (Governance, Regulation, Etc.) 58 4.6 Conclusion 59 References 59 5 Leveraging SDN for the 5G Networks: Trends, Prospects, and Challenges 61Akram Hakiri and Pascal Berthou 5.1 Introduction 61 5.2 Evolution of the Wireless Communication toward the 5G 62 5.2.1 Evolution of the Wireless World 62 5.3 Software Defined Networks 64 5.4 NFV 65 5.5 Information]Centric Networking 67 5.6 Mobile and Wireless Networks 68 5.6.1 Mobility Management 68 5.6.2 Ubiquitous Connectivity 69 5.6.3 Mobile Clouds 70 5.7 Cooperative Cellular Networks 71 5.8 Unification of the Control Plane 73 5.8.1 Bringing Fixed–Mobile Networking Together 73 5.8.2 Creating a Concerted Convergence of Packet–Optical Networks 74 5.9 Supporting Automatic QoS Provisioning 75 5.10 Cognitive Network Management and Operation 76 5.11 Role of Satellites in the 5G Networks 77 5.12 Conclusion 79 References 79 Part II SDMN Architectures and Network Implementation 6 LTE Architecture Integration with SDN 83Jose Costa]Requena, Raimo Kantola, Jesús Llorente Santos, Vicent Ferrer Guasch, Maël Kimmerlin, Antti Mikola and Jukka Manner 6.1 Overview 83 6.2 Restructuring Mobile Networks to SDN 84 6.2.1 LTE Network: A Starting Point 84 6.2.2 Options for Location of the SDMN Controller 86 6.2.3 Vision of SDN in LTE Networks 88 6.3 Mobile Backhaul Scaling 91 6.4 Security and Distributed FW 95 6.4.1 Customer Edge Switching 97 6.4.2 RG 97 6.5 SDN and LTE Integration Benefits 98 6.6 SDN and LTE Integration Benefits for End Users 100 6.7 Related Work and Research Questions 103 6.7.1 Research Problems 104 6.7.2 Impact 104 6.8 Conclusions 104 References 105 7 EPC in the Cloud 107James Kempf and Kumar Balachandran 7.1 Introduction 107 7.1.1 Origins and Evolution of SDN 108 7.1.2 NFV and Its Application 109 7.1.3 SDN and Cross]Domain Service Development 112 7.2 EPC in the Cloud Version 1.0 115 7.3 EPC in the Cloud Version 2.0? 117 7.3.1 UE Multihoming 117 7.3.2 The EPC on SDN: OpenFlow Example 119 7.4 Incorporating Mobile Services into Cross]Domain Orchestration with SP]SDN 123 7.5 Summary and Conclusions 125 References 126 8 The Controller Placement Problem in Software Defined Mobile Networks (SDMN) 129Hakan Selvi, Selcan Güner, Gürkan Gür, and Fatih Alagöz 8.1 Introduction 129 8.2 SDN and Mobile Networks 130 8.3 Performance Objectives for SDMN Controller Placement 132 8.3.1 Scalability 133 8.3.2 Reliability 133 8.3.3 Latency 134 8.3.4 Resilience 135 8.4 CPP 136 8.4.1 Placement of Controllers 137 8.4.2 Number of Required Controllers 143 8.4.3 CPP and Mobile Networks 145 8.5 Conclusion 146 References 147 9 Technology Evolution in Mobile Networks 149Antti Tolonen and Sakari Luukkainen 9.1 Introduction 149 9.2 Generic Technology Evolution 150 9.3 Study Framework 152 9.4 Overview on Cloud Computing 153 9.5 Example Platform: OpenStack 154 9.5.1 OpenStack Design and Architecture 155 9.5.2 OpenStack Community 156 9.6 Case Analysis 156 9.6.1 Openness 157 9.6.2 Added Value 157 9.6.3 Experimentation 158 9.6.4 Complementary Technologies 158 9.6.5 Incumbent Role 159 9.6.6 Existing Market Leverage 160 9.6.7 Competence Change 160 9.6.8 Competing Technologies 160 9.6.9 System Architecture Evolution 161 9.6.10 Regulation 161 9.7 Discussion 162 9.8 Summary 164 Acknowledgments 165 References 165 Part III Traffic Transport and Network Management 10 Mobile Network Function and Service Delivery Virtualization and Orchestration 169Peter Bosch, Alessandro Duminuco, Jeff Napper, Louis (Sam) Samuel, and Paul Polakos 10.1 Introduction 169 10.2 NFV 170 10.2.1 The Functionality of the Architecture 170 10.2.2 Operation of the ETSI NFV System 174 10.2.3 Potential Migration and Deployment Paths 177 10.2.4 NFV Summary 182 10.3 SDN 182 10.4 The Mobility Use Case 183 10.5 Virtual Networking in Data Centers 185 10.6 Summary 186 References 186 11 Survey of Traffic Management in Software Defined Mobile Networks 189Zoltán Faigl and László Bokor 11.1 Overview 189 11.2 Traffic Management in Mobile Networks 190 11.3 QoS Enforcement and Policy Control in 3G/4G Networks 191 11.3.1 QoS for EPS Bearers 193 11.3.2 QoS for Non]3GPP Access 195 11.3.3 QoS Enforcement in EPS 195 11.3.4 Policy and Charging Control in 3GPP 195 11.3.5 Policy Control Architecture 196 11.4 Traffic Management in SDMNs 198 11.4.1 Open Networking Foundation 198 11.4.2 The OF Protocol 199 11.4.3 Traffic Management and Offloading in Mobile Networks 200 11.5 ALTO in SDMNs 201 11.5.1 The ALTO Protocol 202 11.5.2 ALTO–SDN Use Case 202 11.5.3 The ALTO–SDN Architecture 204 11.5.4 Dynamic Network Information Provision 205 11.6 Conclusions 206 References 206 12 Software Defined Networks for Mobile Application Services 209Ram Gopal Lakshmi Narayanan 12.1 Overview 209 12.2 Overview of 3GPP Network Architecture 210 12.3 Wireless Network Architecture Evolution toward NFV and SDN 212 12.3.1 NFV in Packet Core 212 12.3.2 SDN in Packet Core 213 12.4 NFV/SDN Service Chaining 215 12.4.1 Service Chaining at Packet Core 215 12.4.2 Traffic Optimization inside Mobile Networks 217 12.4.3 Metadata Export from RAN to Packet CN 221 12.5 Open Research and Further Study 222 References 223 13 Load Balancing in Software Defined Mobile Networks 225Ijaz Ahmad, Suneth Namal Karunarathna, Mika Ylianttila, and Andrei Gurtov 13.1 Introduction 225 13.1.1 Load Balancing in Wireless Networks 226 13.1.2 Mobility Load Balancing 227 13.1.3 Traffic Steering 227 13.1.4 Load Balancing in Heterogeneous Networks 227 13.1.5 Shortcomings in Current Load Balancing Technologies 227 13.2 Load Balancing in SDMN 229 13.2.1 The Need of Load Balancing in SDMN 230 13.2.2 SDN]Enabled Load Balancing 233 13.3 Future Directions and Challenges for Load Balancing Technologies 244 References 244 Part IV Res ource and Mobility Management 14 QoE Management Framework for Internet Services in SDN]Enabled Mobile Networks 249Marcus Eckert and Thomas Martin Knoll 14.1 Overview 249 14.2 Introduction 250 14.3 State of the Art 251 14.4 QoE Framework Architecture 252 14.5 Quality Monitoring 254 14.5.1 Flow Detection and Classification 254 14.5.2 Video Quality Measurement 255 14.5.3 Video Quality Rating 255 14.5.4 Method of Validation 257 14.5.5 Location]Aware Monitoring 259 14.6 Quality Rules 259 14.7 QoE Enforcement (QEN) 260 14.8 Demonstrator 261 14.9 Summary 263 References 264 15 Software Defined Mobility Management for Mobile Internet 265Jun Bi and You Wang 15.1 Chapter Overview 265 15.1.1 Mobility Management in the Internet 265 15.1.2 Integrating Internet Mobility Management and SDN 267 15.1.3 Chapter Organization 267 15.2 Internet Mobility and Problem Statement 268 15.2.1 Internet Mobility Overview 268 15.2.2 Problem Statement 271 15.2.3 Mobility Management Based on SDN 273 15.3 Software Defined Internet Mobility Management 274 15.3.1 Architecture Overview 274 15.3.2 An OpenFlow]Based Instantiation 275 15.3.3 Binding Cache Placement Algorithm 277 15.3.4 System Design 281 15.4 Conclusion 285 References 285 16 Mobile Virtual Network Operators: A Software Defined Mobile Network Perspective 289M. Bala Krishna 16.1 Introduction 289 16.1.1 Features of MVNO 291 16.1.2 Functional Aspects of MVNO 292 16.1.3 Challenges of MVNO 293 16.2 Architecture of MVNO: An SDMN Perspective 294 16.2.1 Types of MVNOs 294 16.2.2 Hierarchical MVNOs 294 16.3 MNO, MVNE, and MVNA Interactions with MVNO 296 16.3.1 Potential Business Strategies between MNOs, MVNEs, and MVNOs 299 16.3.2 Performance Gain with SDN Approach 300 16.3.3 Cooperation between MNOs and MVNOs 300 16.3.4 Flexible Business Models for Heterogeneous Environments 301 16.4 MVNO Developments in 3G, 4G, and LTE 303 16.4.1 MVNO User]Centric Strategies for Mobility Support 303 16.4.2 Management Schemes for Multiple Interfaces 304 16.4.3 Enhancing Business Strategies Using SDN Approach 304 16.5 Cognitive MVNO 305 16.5.1 Cognitive Radio Management in MVNOs 305 16.5.2 Cognitive and SDN]Based Spectral Allocation Strategies in MVNO 306 16.6 MVNO Business Strategies 307 16.6.1 Services and Pricing of MVNO 308 16.6.2 Resource Negotiation and Pricing 309 16.6.3 Pushover Cellular and Service Adoption Strategy 309 16.6.4 Business Relations between the MNO and MVNO 310 16.7 Conclusions 310 16.8 Future Directions 311 References 311 Part V Security and Economic Aspects 17 Software Defined Mobile Network Security 317Ahmed Bux Abro 17.1 Introduction 317 17.2 Evolving Threat Landscape for Mobile Networks 318 17.3 Traditional Ways to Cope with Security Threats in Mobile Networks 318 17.3.1 Introducing New Controls 318 17.3.2 Securing Perimeter 319 17.3.3 Building Complex Security Systems 320 17.3.4 Throwing More Bandwidth 320 17.4 Principles of Adequate Security for Mobile Network 320 17.4.1 Confidentiality 321 17.4.2 Integrity 321 17.4.3 Availability 321 17.4.4 Centralized Policy 321 17.4.5 Visibility 322 17.5 Typical Security Architecture for Mobile Networks 322 17.5.1 Pros 323 17.5.2 Cons 325 17.6 Enhanced Security for SDMN 325 17.6.1 Securing SDN Controller 325 17.6.2 Securing Infrastructure/Data Center 325 17.6.3 Application Security 326 17.6.4 Securing Management and Orchestration 326 17.6.5 Securing API and Communication 326 17.6.6 Security Technologies 326 17.7 SDMN Security Applications 327 17.7.1 Encryption: eNB to Network 327 17.7.2 Segmentation 327 17.7.3 Network Telemetry 329 References 329 18 Security Aspects of SDMN 331Edgardo Montes de Oca and Wissam Mallouli 18.1 Overview 331 18.2 State of the Art and Security Challenges in SDMN Architectures 331 18.2.1 Basics 332 18.2.2 LTE]EPC Security State of the Art 332 18.2.3 SDN Security in LTE]EPC State of the Art 334 18.2.4 Related Work 339 18.3 Monitoring Techniques 344 18.3.1 DPI 347 18.3.2 NIDS 348 18.3.3 Software Defined Monitoring 349 18.4 Other Important Aspects 351 18.4.1 Reaction and Mitigation Techniques 351 18.4.2 Economically Viable Security Techniques for Mobile Networks 352 18.4.3 Secure Mobile Network Services and Security Management 353 18.5 Conclusion 354 References 355 19 SDMN: Industry Architecture Evolution Paths 357Nan Zhang, Tapio Levä, and Heikki Hämmäinen 19.1 Introduction 357 19.2 From Current Mobile Networks to SDMN 358 19.2.1 Current Mobile Network Architecture 358 19.2.2 Evolutionary SDMN Architecture 359 19.2.3 Revolutionary SDMN Architecture 361 19.3 Business Roles of SDMN 362 19.4 Industry Architectures of Evolutionary SDMN 364 19.4.1 Monolithic MNO 364 19.4.2 Outsourced Subscriber Management 366 19.4.3 Outsourced Connectivity 368 19.5 Industry Architectures of Revolutionary SDMN 369 19.5.1 MVNO 369 19.5.2 Outsourced Interconnection 370 19.5.3 Outsourced Mobility Management 372 19.6 Discussion 372 References 374 Index 000

Read more less

Book SynopsisDISTRIBUTED MODEL PREDICTIVE CONTROL FOR PLANT-WIDE SYSTEMS In this book, experienced researchers gave a thorough explanation of distributed model predictive control (DMPC): its basic concepts, technologies, and implementation in plant-wide systems. Known for its error tolerance, high flexibility, and good dynamic performance, DMPC is a popular topic in the control field and is widely applied in many industries. To efficiently design DMPC systems, readers will be introduced to several categories of coordinated DMPCs, which are suitable for different control requirements, such as network connectivity, error tolerance, performance of entire closed-loop systems, and calculation of speed. Various real-life industrial applications, theoretical results, and algorithms are provided to illustrate key concepts and methods, as well as to provide solutions to optimize the global performance of plant-wide systems. Features system partition methods, coordinationTable of ContentsPreface xi About the Authors xv Acknowledgement xvii List of Figures xix List of Tables xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Plant-Wide System 1 1.2 Control System Structure of the Plant-Wide System 3 1.2.1 Centralized Control 4 1.2.2 Decentralized Control and Hierarchical Coordinated Decentralized Control 5 1.2.3 Distributed Control 6 1.3 Predictive Control 8 1.3.1 What is Predictive Control 8 1.3.2 Advantage of Predictive Control 9 1.4 Distributed Predictive Control 9 1.4.1 Why Distributed Predictive Control 9 1.4.2 What is Distributed Predictive Control 10 1.4.3 Advantage of Distributed Predictive Control 10 1.4.4 Classification of DMPC 11 1.5 About this Book 13 Part I FOUNDATION 2 Model Predictive Control 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Dynamic Matrix Control 20 2.2.1 Step Response Model 20 2.2.2 Prediction 21 2.2.3 Optimization 22 2.2.4 Feedback Correction 23 2.2.5 DMC with Constraint 24 2.3 Predictive Control with the State Space Model 26 2.3.1 System Model 27 2.3.2 Performance Index 28 2.3.3 Prediction 28 2.3.4 Closed-Loop Solution 30 2.3.5 State Space MPC with Constraint 31 2.4 Dual Mode Predictive Control 33 2.4.1 Invariant Region 33 2.4.2 MPC Formulation 34 2.4.3 Algorithms 35 2.4.4 Feasibility and Stability 36 2.5 Conclusion 37 3 Control Structure of Distributed MPC 39 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Centralized MPC 40 3.3 Single-Layer Distributed MPC 41 3.4 Hierarchical Distributed MPC 42 3.5 Example of the Hierarchical DMPC Structure 43 3.6 Conclusion 45 4 Structure Model and System Decomposition 47 4.1 Introduction 47 4.2 System Mathematic Model 48 4.3 Structure Model and Structure Controllability 50 4.3.1 Structure Model 50 4.3.2 Function of the Structure Model in System Decomposition 51 4.3.3 Input–Output Accessibility 53 4.3.4 General Rank of the Structure Matrix 56 4.3.5 Structure Controllability 56 4.4 Related Gain Array Decomposition 58 4.4.1 RGA Definition 59 4.4.2 RGA Interpretation 60 4.4.3 Pairing Rules 61 4.5 Conclusion 63 Part II UNCONSTRAINED DISTRIBUTED PREDICTIVE CONTROL 5 Local Cost Optimization-based Distributed Model Predictive Control 67 5.1 Introduction 67 5.2 Local Cost Optimization-based Distributed Predictive Control 68 5.2.1 Problem Description 68 5.2.2 DMPC Formulation 69 5.2.3 Closed-loop Solution 72 5.2.4 Stability Analysis 79 5.2.5 Simulation Results 79 5.3 Distributed MPC Strategy Based on Nash Optimality 82 5.3.1 Formulation 83 5.3.2 Algorithm 86 5.3.3 Computational Convergence for Linear Systems 86 5.3.4 Nominal Stability of Distributed Model Predictive Control System 88 5.3.5 Performance Analysis with Single-step Horizon Control Under Communication Failure 89 5.3.6 Simulation Results 94 5.4 Conclusion 99 Appendix 99 Appendix A. QP problem transformation 99 Appendix B. Proof of Theorem 5.1 100 6 Cooperative Distributed Predictive Control 103 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 Noniterative Cooperative DMPC 104 6.2.1 System Description 104 6.2.2 Formulation 104 6.2.3 Closed-Form Solution 107 6.2.4 Stability and Performance Analysis 109 6.2.5 Example 113 6.3 Distributed Predictive Control based on Pareto Optimality 114 6.3.1 Formulation 118 6.3.2 Algorithm 119 6.3.3 The DMPC Algorithm Based on Plant-Wide Optimality 119 6.3.4 The Convergence Analysis of the Algorithm 121 6.4 Simulation 121 6.5 Conclusions 123 7 Networked Distributed Predictive Control with Information Structure Constraints 125 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Noniterative Networked DMPC 126 7.2.1 Problem Description 126 7.2.2 DMPC Formulation 127 7.2.3 Closed-Form Solution 132 7.2.4 Stability Analysis 135 7.2.5 Analysis of Performance 135 7.2.6 Numerical Validation 137 7.3 Networked DMPC with Iterative Algorithm 144 7.3.1 Problem Description 144 7.3.2 DMPC Formulation 145 7.3.3 Networked MPC Algorithm 147 7.3.4 Convergence and Optimality Analysis for Networked 150 7.3.5 Nominal Stability Analysis for Distributed Control Systems 152 7.3.6 Simulation Study 153 7.4 Conclusion 159 Appendix 159 Appendix A. Proof of Lemma 7.1 159 Appendix B. Proof of Lemma 7.2 160 Appendix C. Proof of Lemma 7.3 160 Appendix D. Proof of Theorem 7.1 161 Appendix E. Proof of Theorem 7.2 161 Appendix F. Derivation of the QP problem (7.52) 164 Part III CONSTRAINT DISTRIBUTED PREDICTIVE CONTROL 8 Local Cost Optimization Based Distributed Predictive Control with Constraints 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Problem Description 170 8.3 Stabilizing Dual Mode Noncooperative DMPC with Input Constraints 171 8.3.1 Formulation 171 8.3.2 Algorithm Design for Resolving Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 176 8.4 Analysis 177 8.4.1 Recursive Feasibility of Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 177 8.4.2 Stability Analysis of Entire Closed-loop System 183 8.5 Example 184 8.5.1 The System 184 8.5.2 Performance Comparison with the Centralized MPC 185 8.6 Conclusion 187 9 Cooperative Distributed Predictive Control with Constraints 189 9.1 Introduction 189 9.2 System Description 190 9.3 Stabilizing Cooperative DMPC with Input Constraints 191 9.3.1 Formulation 191 9.3.2 Constraint C-DMPC Algorithm 193 9.4 Analysis 194 9.4.1 Feasibility 194 9.4.2 Stability 199 9.5 Simulation 201 9.6 Conclusion 208 10 Networked Distributed Predictive Control with Inputs and Information Structure Constraints 209 10.1 Introduction 209 10.2 Problem Description 210 10.3 Constrained N-DMPC 212 10.3.1 Formulation 212 10.3.2 Algorithm Design for Resolving Each Subsystem-based Predictive Control 218 10.4 Analysis 219 10.4.1 Feasibility 219 10.4.2 Stability 225 10.5 Formulations Under Other Coordination Strategies 227 10.5.1 Local Cost Optimization Based DMPC 227 10.5.2 Cooperative DMPC 228 10.6 Simulation Results 229 10.6.1 The System 229 10.6.2 Performance of Closed-loop System under the N-DMPC 230 10.6.3 Performance Comparison with the Centralized MPC and the Local Cost Optimization based MPC 231 10.7 Conclusions 236 Part IV APPLICATION 11 Hot-Rolled Strip Laminar Cooling Process with Distributed Predictive Control 239 11.1 Introduction 239 11.2 Laminar Cooling of Hot-rolled Strip 240 11.2.1 Description 240 11.2.2 Thermodynamic Model 241 11.2.3 Problem Statement 242 11.3 Control Strategy of HSLC 244 11.3.1 State Space Model of Subsystems 244 11.3.2 Design of Extended Kalman Filter 247 11.3.3 Predictor 247 11.3.4 Local MPC Formulation 248 11.3.5 Iterative Algorithm 249 11.4 Numerical Experiment 251 11.4.1 Validation of Designed Model 251 11.4.2 Convergence of EKF 252 11.4.3 Performance of DMPC Comparing with Centralized MPC 252 11.4.4 Advantages of the Proposed DMPC Framework Comparing with the Existing Method 253 11.5 Experimental Results 256 11.6 Conclusion 258 12 High-Speed Train Control with Distributed Predictive Control 263 12.1 Introduction 263 12.2 System Description 264 12.3 N-DMPC for High-Speed Trains 264 12.3.1 Three Types of Force 264 12.3.2 The Force Analysis of EMUs 266 12.3.3 Model of CRH2 267 12.3.4 Performance Index 271 12.3.5 Optimization Problem 272 12.4 Simulation Results 272 12.4.1 Parameters of CRH2 273 12.4.2 Simulation Matrix 273 12.4.3 Results and Some Comments 274 12.5 Conclusion 278 13 Operation Optimization of Multitype Cooling Source System Based on DMPC 279 13.1 Introduction 279 13.2 Structure of Joint Cooling System 279 13.3 Control Strategy of Joint Cooling System 280 13.3.1 Economic Optimization Strategy 281 13.3.2 Design of Distributed Model Predictive Control in Multitype Cold Source System 283 13.4 Results and Analysis of Simulation 286 13.5 Conclusion 292 References 293 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisBuilding upon the success of the first edition (2007), Wireless Transceiver Design 2nd Edition is an accessible textbook that explains the concepts of wireless transceiver design in detail. The architectures and the detailed design of both traditional and advanced all-digital wireless transceivers are discussed in a thorough and systematic manner, while carefully watching out for clarity and simplicity. Many practical examples and solved problems at the end of each chapter allow students to thoroughly understand the mechanisms involved, to build confidence, and enable them to readily make correct and practical use of the applicable results and formulas. From the instructors'' perspective, the book will enable the reader to build courses at different levels of depth, starting from the basic understanding, whilst allowing them to focus on particular elements of study. In addition to numerous fully-solved exercises, the authors include actual exemplary examination papers for insTable of ContentsForeword xvi To the Instructor xvii About the Authors xviii Acknowledgment xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Radio Frequency Systems 1 1.1.1 Conceptual RF system 1 1.1.2 The frequency spectrum 2 1.1.3 Cellular concept 3 1.2 Detailed Overview of Wireless Systems and Technologies 4 1.2.1 System types 4 1.2.2 Wireless network architectures 5 1.2.2.1 Wireless Personal Area Network 5 1.2.3 Wireless local area network 11 1.2.3.1 Wi-Fi 13 1.2.3.2 Wi-Fi Direct 14 1.2.4 Wireless wide area network 14 1.2.4.1 Cellular Systems 14 1.2.4.2 The Concept of Frequency Reuse 14 1.2.5 Access methods 20 1.2.5.1 Multiple access 20 1.2.5.2 Frequency division multiple access 20 1.2.5.3 Time division multiple access 21 1.2.5.4 Code division multiple access 21 1.2.5.5 Why to spread? 22 1.2.6 Transmit–receive regimes 24 1.2.6.1 Wireless transmission regimes (or modes) 24 1.2.6.2 Simplex mode 24 1.2.6.3 Half-duplex mode 25 1.2.6.4 Full duplex mode 25 1.2.6.5 Duplexing 25 1.2.6.6 Frequency division duplex 25 1.2.6.7 Time division duplex 26 Bibliography 26 2 Transceiver Architectures 27 2.1 Receiver Architectures 27 2.2 Superheterodyne Receiver 29 2.2.1 What is it and how it works 29 2.2.2 Pros and cons 33 2.2.3 Choosing the IF frequency 34 2.3 Direct Conversion Receiver 35 2.3.1 What is it and how it works 35 2.3.2 Pros and cons 35 2.4 Direct RF Sampling Receiver 36 2.4.1 What is it and how it works 36 2.4.1.1 Exercise: Determining sampling rate 40 2.4.2 Recovering I and Q channels in DRFS 40 2.4.2.1 Exercise: Recovering I and Q with bandwidth oversampling 41 2.5 Transmitter Architectures 42 2.6 Two Step Conversion Transmitter 43 2.6.1 What is it and how it works 43 2.6.2 Pros and cons 45 2.7 Direct Launch Transmitter 46 2.7.1 What is it and how it works 46 2.7.2 Pros and cons 46 2.8 Direct RF Sampling Transmitter 47 2.9 Transceiver Architectures 51 2.10 Full Duplex/Half-duplex Architecture 51 2.11 Simplex Architecture 52 2.12 Solved Exercises 53 2.13 Theory Behind Equations 59 2.13.1 DRFS transmitter 59 2.13.2 Sampling theorem reminder 60 Bibliography 62 3 Receiving Systems 63 3.1 Sensitivity 65 3.1.1 What is it and how it works 65 3.1.1.1 The definition of sensitivity 67 3.1.1.2 Exercise: Estimating a cell phone range 68 3.1.2 Interim sensitivity 69 3.1.2.1 Computing the noise factor of two cascaded stages 70 3.1.2.2 Exercise: Cascaded noise factor 71 3.1.2.3 Exercise: Computing SHR sensitivity 72 3.1.3 Measurement of sensitivity 74 3.1.3.1 Noise doubling approach 75 3.2 Co-channel Rejection 76 3.2.1 What is it and how it works 76 3.2.1.1 Definition of co-channel rejection 76 3.2.2 Measurement of co-channel rejection 77 3.3 Selectivity 78 3.3.1 What is it and how it works 78 3.3.1.1 Oscillator phase noise 78 3.3.1.2 Exercise: L (Δf) estimation 81 3.3.1.3 Selectivity mechanisms 82 3.3.1.4 The definition of selectivity 84 3.3.1.5 Exercise: DCR selectivity 85 3.3.2 Measurement of selectivity 85 3.4 Blocking 86 3.4.1 What is it and how it works 86 3.4.1.1 The definition of blocking 87 3.4.1.2 Exercise: Blocking-free distance 88 3.4.2 Measurement of blocking 89 3.5 Intermodulation Rejection 89 3.5.1 What is it and how it works 89 3.5.1.1 The definition of intermodulation 91 3.5.1.2 Effect of added gain (or loss) 92 3.5.1.3 Exercise: Intermodulation 94 3.5.2 Measurement of intermodulation 94 3.6 Image Rejection 95 3.6.1 What is it and how it works 95 3.6.1.1 The definition of image rejection 97 3.6.1.2 Exercise: IR and front filter 97 3.6.2 Measurement of image rejection 98 3.7 Half-IF Rejection 98 3.7.1 What is it and how it works 98 3.7.1.1 The definition of half-IF rejection 100 3.7.1.2 Exercise: HIFR and front filter 101 3.7.2 Measurement of half-IF rejection 102 3.8 Dynamic Range 102 3.8.1 What is it and how it works 102 3.8.1.1 The definition of dynamic range 103 3.8.2 Measurement of dynamic range 103 3.9 Duplex Desense 103 3.9.1 What is it and how it works 103 3.9.1.1 The definition of duplex desense 105 3.9.1.2 Exercise: Required T-R attenuation to keep DS ≤ 3dB 105 3.9.2 Measurement of duplex desense 106 3.10 Other Duplex Spurs 107 3.10.1 What they are and how they work 107 3.10.1.1 Duplex image rejection 107 3.10.1.2 Half duplex spur 107 3.10.1.3 Phantom duplex spur 108 3.11 Other Receiver Interferences 108 3.11.1 What they are and how they work 108 3.11.1.1 Self quieters 108 3.11.1.2 Able–baker spurs 110 3.11.1.3 Doppler blocking 110 3.11.1.4 Second-order distortion 110 3.11.1.5 Spurious free dynamic range 111 3.12 Solved Exercises 111 3.13 Theory Behind Equations 126 3.13.1 Sensitivity 126 3.13.2 Co-channel rejection 128 3.13.3 Selectivity 128 3.13.4 Intermodulation 129 3.13.5 Image rejection 130 3.13.6 Half-IF rejection 131 3.13.7 Duplexer mechanisms 132 3.13.7.1 Isolation mechanism 132 3.13.7.2 Noise attenuation mechanism 134 3.13.8 Duplex desense 135 3.14 Extension to Direct RF Sampling Receivers 136 3.14.1 ADC noise factor 136 3.14.1.1 Exercise: Computing ADC noise floor and noise figure 137 3.14.1.2 Exercise: Computing DRFS sensitivity 137 3.14.2 SNR, selectivity, and blocking in a DRFS receiver 138 3.14.2.1 Snr 139 3.14.2.2 Selectivity and blocking 140 3.14.2.3 Exercise: DRFS blocking 141 3.14.2.4 Imr 3 142 3.14.2.5 Exercise: Estimating IP3i of an ADC 142 3.14.3 Reminder on quantization noise 142 Bibliography 143 4 Transmitting Systems 145 4.1 Peak to Average Power Ratio 147 4.1.1 What is it and how it works 147 4.1.1.1 Exercise: PAPR of unfiltered 16 QAM 148 4.1.2 Measurement of PAPR 150 4.2 Nonlinearity in RF Power Amplifiers 150 4.2.1 What is it and how it works 150 4.2.2 Third-order dominated PA behavior 154 4.2.2.1 Exercise: Computation of third-order dominated PA coefficients 155 4.2.3 Fifth-order dominated PA behavior 157 4.2.3.1 Exercise: computation of fifth-order dominated PA coefficients 157 4.2.4 In-band spectral picture of PA output 159 4.2.5 Description of PA simulation methodology 160 4.2.5.1 The input signal v(t) 161 4.2.5.2 The output signal V[v(t)] 163 4.2.5.3 The input and output spectral picture 163 4.2.6 N-th order intermodulation distortion 163 4.2.6.1 Exercise: Coefficient-based versus SPICE simulation of spectral re-growth 168 4.2.6.2 Laboratory measurement of IMDN 171 4.2.7 N-th order input intercept point 171 4.2.7.1 Exercise: Estimating IMDN from IPNi 172 4.2.7.2 Exercise: Rule of thumb 173 4.2.7.3 Exercise: IPNi using voltages 173 4.3 Transmitter Specifications 174 4.3.1 Spectral mask 174 4.3.2 Error vector magnitude 174 4.3.2.1 Other causes of EVM degradation 176 4.3.3 Adjacent coupled power ratio 176 4.3.4 PA efficiency 177 4.3.5 Transmitter transients 178 4.3.5.1 Attack time 178 4.3.5.2 Frequency shift upon keying 179 4.3.6 Radiated emission 179 4.3.7 Conducted spurs 179 4.4 Enhancement Techniques 180 4.4.1 Linearization techniques 181 4.4.1.1 Cartesian feedback 181 4.4.1.2 Feed-forward 183 4.4.1.3 Pre-distortion 185 4.4.2 Envelope-tracking supply 186 4.5 Solved Exercises 186 4.6 Theory Behind Equations 198 4.6.1 Computation of PAPR for quasi-static RF signals 198 4.6.2 Analytic models for PA nonlinearity 201 4.6.3 Effects of PA nonlinearity on digital modulation 204 4.6.4 Effects of PA nonlinearity on spectral shape 205 4.6.5 Characterization of PA nonlinearity 210 4.6.5.1 N-th order intermodulation distortion 212 4.6.5.2 N-th order input intercept point 213 Bibliography 214 5 Synthesizers 216 5.1 Integer-N Synthesizer 216 5.1.1 What is it and how it works 216 5.1.1.1 The lock-up mechanism 219 5.1.1.2 Lock-up time 221 5.1.1.3 Exercise: Estimating integer-N lock time 224 5.1.1.4 Something more on reference spurs and pre-integration capacitor 225 5.1.1.5 Exercise: Estimating reference spurs attenuation 225 5.1.1.6 Something more on phase-frequency detector modes 226 5.2 Fractional-N Synthesizer 228 5.2.1 What is it and how it works 228 5.2.1.1 Exercise: Estimating fractional-N lock time 230 5.2.2 Example: Dual-count fractional-N 231 5.3 Direct Digital Synthesizer 232 5.3.1 What is it and how it works 232 5.3.1.1 Exercise: Basic DDS design 234 5.4 Integer-N/DDS Hybrid Synthesizer 235 5.4.1 What is it and how it works 235 5.5 Solved Exercises 236 5.6 Theory Behind Equations 244 5.6.1 Integer-N analysis 244 5.6.1.1 Transient analysis 246 5.6.1.2 Lock time analysis 250 Bibliography 251 6 Oscillators 253 6.1 Low-power Self-limiting Oscillators 254 6.1.1 What is it and how it works 254 6.1.1.1 The self-limiting oscillation mechanism 254 6.1.1.2 Oscillator phase noise 257 6.1.2 Practical circuits 258 6.1.2.1 Exercise: NAND gate-driven oscillator 260 6.1.2.2 Exercise: Bipolar transistor-driven oscillator 264 6.2 Oscillators Using Distributed Resonators 270 6.2.1 What is it and how it works 270 6.2.1.1 Crystal resonators 270 6.2.1.2 Transmission-line resonators 271 6.3 Solved Exercises 273 6.4 Theory Behind Equations 288 6.4.1 General π-topology filter analysis 288 6.4.2 Leeson’s equation 290 6.4.2.1 Narrowband FM 290 6.4.2.2 Narrowband-FM through narrow band-pass filters 291 6.4.2.3 Leeson’s model 293 6.4.2.4 Computing clock jitter from oscillator phase noise 296 6.4.3 Lumped equivalent of resonant transmission lines 299 6.4.3.1 Open-ended λ/4 resonator – lumped equivalent 300 6.4.3.2 Short-ended λ/4 resonator – lumped equivalent 301 6.4.4 Voltage controlled oscillators 301 Bibliography 302 7 Functional RF Blocks 303 7.1 Antenna 303 7.1.1 What is it? 303 7.1.2 How it works 303 7.1.3 Basic parameters of antennas 304 7.1.3.1 Radiation pattern 304 7.1.3.2 Directivity 304 7.1.3.3 Efficiency 305 7.1.3.4 Gain 305 7.1.3.5 Effective area 305 7.1.3.6 Input impedance and radiation resistance 305 7.1.3.7 Measurement of antenna input impedance 306 7.1.3.8 Beamwidth 307 7.1.3.9 Polarization 307 7.1.4 Antenna arrays 307 7.1.4.1 Pattern multiplication principle 308 7.1.5 Smart antennas 308 7.1.5.1 Phased array 308 7.1.6 Antenna types 308 7.1.6.1 Isotropic antennas 309 7.1.6.2 Dipole 309 7.1.6.3 Whip 309 7.1.6.4 Planar inverted-F 310 7.1.6.5 Slot 310 7.1.6.6 Microstrip (patch) antennas 311 7.1.7 Solved exercises 312 7.2 Low Noise Amplifier 313 7.2.1 What is it and how it works 313 7.2.2 Noise of two-port networks (classical approach) 314 7.2.2.1 MOS transistor thermal noise 316 7.2.2.2 Stability 317 7.2.2.3 Matching options 317 7.2.3 LNA topologies 318 7.2.3.1 Shunt resistor at input – resistor termination 318 7.2.3.2 Shunt-series feedback 319 7.2.3.3 Common gate LNA 319 7.2.3.4 CS with inductive source degeneration 320 7.3 Filters 323 7.3.1 Filter design 325 7.3.2 Filter families 326 7.3.2.1 Butterworth filter 326 7.3.2.2 Chebyshev filter 326 7.3.2.3 Elliptic filter 327 7.3.2.4 Bessel filter 327 7.3.3 Filter types 327 7.3.3.1 Preselector filter 327 7.3.3.2 Diplexer 328 7.3.3.3 IF filter 328 7.3.3.4 Harmonic filter 328 7.3.4 Filter technologies 328 7.3.4.1 Crystal filters 328 7.3.4.2 Surface acoustic wave filters 329 7.4 Power Amplifier 330 7.4.1 Amplifier classes 331 7.4.1.1 Class A 331 7.4.1.2 Class B 332 7.4.1.3 Class AB 333 7.4.1.4 class c 333 7.4.2 Design 334 7.5 Mixer 341 7.5.1 Performance measures 341 7.5.1.1 Conversion loss/gain 342 7.5.1.2 Noise figure 342 7.5.1.3 Linearity 342 7.5.1.4 Isolation 342 7.5.1.5 Spurs 342 7.5.2 Mixer types 342 7.5.2.1 Unbalanced mixers 343 7.5.2.2 Single-balanced mixers 343 7.5.2.3 Double-balanced mixers 343 7.5.3 MOSFET mixer 343 7.5.4 Bipolar mixer 345 Bibliography 346 8 Useful Reminders 347 8.1 The RF Channel 347 8.1.1 Large and small scale fading 347 8.1.1.1 Multipath fading 347 8.1.1.2 Propagation delay 348 8.1.1.3 Delay spread 348 8.1.1.4 Coherence bandwidth 349 8.1.2 Fade margin 349 8.1.3 Fading classification 349 8.1.3.1 Flat fading 350 8.1.3.2 Frequency-selective fading 350 8.1.3.3 Slow fading 350 8.1.3.4 Fast fading 350 8.1.3.5 Rayleigh fading 350 8.1.3.6 Rice fading 351 8.1.4 Doppler effect 351 8.2 Noise 352 8.2.1 Thermal noise 352 8.2.2 Signal to noise ratio 353 8.2.3 Noise factor and noise figure 353 8.2.3.1 Noise figure of cascaded stages 354 8.2.3.2 Noise floor 354 8.3 Propagation 355 8.3.1 Logarithmic scale 355 8.3.2 Friis formula 355 8.3.3 Two ray model 356 8.4 Path loss 357 8.5 Modulation 357 8.5.1 Amplitude modulation 357 8.5.2 Frequency modulation 359 8.5.2.1 FM transmitter 360 8.5.2.2 FM receiver 360 8.5.3 Modeling carrier phase noise as narrowband FM 361 8.6 Multiple Input Multiple Output 362 8.6.1 How many independent data streams are possible? 363 Bibliography 364 Appendix – Exemplary Exams 365 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn a unique and systematic way, this book discusses the security and privacy aspects of the cloud, and the relevant cloud forensics. Cloud computing is an emerging yet revolutionary technology that has been changing the way people live and work. However, with the continuous growth of cloud computing and related services, security and privacy has become a critical issue. Written by some of the top experts in the field, this book specifically discusses security and privacy of the cloud, as well as the digital forensics of cloud data, applications, and services. The first half of the book enables readers to have a comprehensive understanding and background of cloud security, which will help them through the digital investigation guidance and recommendations found in the second half of the book. Part One ofSecurity, Privacy and Digital Forensics in theCloudcovers cloud infrastructure security; confidentiality of data; access control in cloud IaaS; clouTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Part I Cloud Security and Privacy 1 1 Introduction to the Cloud and Fundamental Security and Privacy Issues of the Cloud 3Hassan Takabi and Mohammad GhasemiGol 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Cloud Computing and Security Issues 4 1.3 Identity Security in the Cloud 9 1.4 Information Security in the Cloud 9 1.5 Cloud Security Standards 16 1.6 Conclusion 20 References 20 2 Cloud Infrastructure Security 23Mohammad GhasemiGol 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Infrastructure Security in the Cloud 24 2.3 Infrastructure Security Analysis in Some Clouds 31 2.4 Protecting Cloud Infrastructure 45 2.5 Conclusion 49 References 49 3 Confidentiality of Data in the Cloud: Conflicts Between Security and Cost 51Nathalie Baracaldo and Joseph Glider 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Background 51 3.3 Confidentiality: Threats and Adversaries 54 3.4 Achieving Data Confidentiality in Cloud Storage Systems 55 3.5 Reducing Cloud Storage System Costs through Data‐Reduction Techniques 57 3.6 Reconciling Data Reduction and Confidentiality 59 3.7 Trusted Decrypter 62 3.8 Future Directions for Cloud Storage Confidentiality with Low Cost 74 3.9 Conclusions 76 References 77 4 Access Control in Cloud IaaS 81Yun Zhang, Ram Krishnan, Farhan Patwa, and Ravi Sandhu 4.1 Introduction 81 4.2 Background 82 4.3 Access Control in OpenStack Cloud IaaS 83 4.4 Access Control in AWS Cloud IaaS 90 4.5 Access Control in Azure Cloud IaaS 99 4.6 Conclusions 107 References 107 5 Cloud Security and Privacy Management 109Patrick Kamongi 5.1 Introduction and Background 109 5.2 Security and Privacy Analysis 111 5.3 Best Security Practices and Recommendation 117 5.4 Use Case Example: Microsoft Office 365, SaaS Version 118 5.5 Current Trends and Future Direction 125 5.6 Related Works 125 5.7 Conclusion 126 Acknowledgments 126 References 126 6 Hacking and Countermeasures in the Cloud 129Farzaneh Abazari, Hassan Takabi, and Morteza Analoui 6.1 Introduction 129 6.2 Background 130 6.3 Cloud Security Threats 130 6.4 Cloud Security Countermeasures 134 6.5 Hacking the Cloud: Reality Check 136 6.6 Future of Cloud Security 137 6.6.1 Cloud Security for the IoT 138 6.7 Conclusions 139 References 139 7 Risk Management and Disaster Recovery in the Cloud 143Saman Zonouz 7.1 Introduction 143 7.2 Background 143 7.3 Consequence‐ Centric Security Assessment 145 7.4 Future Directions 154 7.5 Conclusions 155 8 Cloud Auditing and Compliance 157Paolina Centonze 8.1 Introduction 157 8.2 Background 157 8.3 Cloud Auditing 162 8.4 Cloud Compliance 170 8.5 Future Research Directions for Cloud Auditing and Compliance 183 8.6 Conclusion 184 References 185 Further Reading 187 9 Security‐as‐a‐Service (SECaaS) in the Cloud 189Saman Taghavi Zargar, Hassan Takabi, and Jay Iyer 9.1 Introduction 189 9.2 Related Work 192 9.3 Security‐ as‐a‐Service Framework 194 9.4 Conclusions 199 References 199 Part II Cloud Forensics 201 10 Cloud Forensics: Model, Challenges, and Approaches 203Lei Chen, Nhien‐An Le‐Khac, Sebastian Schlepphorst, and Lanchuan Xu 10.1 Introduction 203 10.2 Background 204 10.3 Process and Model of Cloud Forensics 207 10.4 Cloud Forensics Methods, Approaches, and Tools 211 10.5 Challenges in Cloud Forensics 213 10.6 Conclusions 214 References 214 11 Cyberterrorism in the Cloud: Through a Glass Darkly 217Barry Cartwright, George R. S. Weir, and Richard Frank 11.1 Introduction 217 11.2 What is Terrorism? 218 11.3 Defining Cyberterrorism 220 11.4 Cyberterrorism vs. Terrorist Use of Cyberspace 221 11.5 Cyberterrorism in the Cloud 222 11.6 The Benefits of the Cloud to Cyberterrorists 225 11.7 Cyberlaw and Cyberterrorism 227 11.8 Conclusion: Through a Glass Darkly 230 References 232 12 Digital Forensic Process and Model in the Cloud 239Nhien‐An Le‐Khac, James Plunkett, M‐Tahar Kechadi, and Lei Chen 12.1 Introduction 239 12.2 Digital Forensics Models 240 12.3 Cloud Forensics Process and Model 243 12.4 Toward a New Cloud Forensics Model 246 12.5 Evaluation and Analysis 251 12.6 Conclusion 253 References 253 13 Data Acquisition in the Cloud 257Nhien‐An Le‐Khac, Michel Mollema, Robert Craig, Steven Ryder, and Lei Chen 13.1 Introduction 257 13.2 Background 258 13.3 Data Center as a Source of Evidence 259 13.4 Cloud Service Providers: Essential Requirements, Governance, and Challenges 260 13.4.1 Business Model 261 13.5 Cloud Storage Forensics 264 13.6 Case Study 1: Finding Data Centers on the Internet in Data‐Dense Environments 265 13.7 Case Study 2: Cloud Forensics for the Amazon Simple Storage Service 274 13.8 Conclusion 281 References 281 14 Digital Evidence Management, Presentation, and Court Preparation in the Cloud: A Forensic Readiness Approach 283Lucia De Marco, Nhien‐An Le‐Khac, and M‐Tahar Kechadi 14.1 Introduction 283 14.2 Cloud Forensics and Challenges 284 14.3 Digital Forensics Readiness 285 14.4 Cloud Forensics Readiness 287 14.5 Forensics Readiness in Evidence Management, Presentation, and Court Preparation 291 14.6 Conclusion 295 References 296 15 Analysis of Cloud Digital Evidence 301Irfan Ahmed and Vassil Roussev 15.1 Introduction 301 15.2 Background 305 15.3 Current Approaches 307 15.4 Proposed Comprehensive Approaches 312 15.5 Discussion 317 15.6 Conclusions 317 References 318 16 Forensics‐as‐a‐Service (FaaS) in the State‐of‐the‐Art Cloud 321Avinash Srinivasan and Frank Ferrese 16.1 Introduction 321 16.2 Background and Motivation 323 16.3 State of the Art in Parallel and Distributed Forensic Analysis 325 16.4 Conclusion and Future Research Direction 334 References 335 Index 339

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn important working resource for engineers and researchers involved in the design, development, and implementation of signal processing systems The last decade has seen a rapid expansion of the use of field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) for a wide range of applications beyond traditional digital signal processing (DSP) systems. Written by a team of experts working at the leading edge of FPGA research and development, this second edition of FPGA-based Implementation of Signal Processing Systems has been extensively updated and revised to reflect the latest iterations of FPGA theory, applications, and technology. Written from a system-level perspective, it features expert discussions of contemporary methods and tools used in the design, optimization and implementation of DSP systems using programmable FPGA hardware. And it provides a wealth of practical insightsalong with illustrative case studies and timely real-world examplesof critical concern to engineers Table of ContentsPreface xv List of Abbreviations xxi 1 Introduction to Field Programmable Gate Arrays 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Field Programmable Gate Arrays 2 1.3 Influence of Programmability 6 1.4 Challenges of FPGAs 8 Bibliography 9 2 DSP Basics 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Definition of DSP Systems 12 2.3 DSP Transformations 16 2.4 Filters 20 2.5 Adaptive Filtering 29 2.6 Final Comments 38 Bibliography 38 3 Arithmetic Basics 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Number Representations 42 3.3 Arithmetic Operations 47 3.4 Alternative Number Representations 55 3.5 Division 59 3.6 Square Root 60 3.7 Fixed-Point versus Floating-Point 64 3.8 Conclusions 66 Bibliography 67 4 Technology Review 70 4.1 Introduction 70 4.2 Implications of Technology Scaling 71 4.3 Architecture and Programmability 72 4.4 DSP Functionality Characteristics 74 4.5 Microprocessors 76 4.6 DSP Processors 82 4.7 Graphical Processing Units 86 4.8 System-on-Chip Solutions 88 4.9 Heterogeneous Computing Platforms 91 4.10 Conclusions 92 Bibliography 92 5 Current FPGA Technologies 94 5.1 Introduction 94 5.2 Toward FPGAs 95 5.3 Altera Stratix® V and 10 FPGA Family 98 5.4 Xilinx UltrascaleTM/Virtex-7 FPGA Families 103 5.5 Xilinx Zynq FPGA Family 107 5.6 Lattice iCE40isp FPGA Family 108 5.7 MicroSemi RTG4 FPGA Family 111 5.8 Design Stratregies for FPGA-based DSP Systems 112 5.9 Conclusions 114 Bibliography 114 6 Detailed FPGA Implementation Techniques 116 6.1 Introduction 116 6.2 FPGA Functionality 117 6.3 Mapping to LUT-Based FPGA Technology 123 6.4 Fixed-Coefficient DSP 125 6.5 Distributed Arithmetic 130 6.6 Reduced-Coefficient Multiplier 133 6.7 Conclusions 137 Bibliography 138 7 Synthesis Tools for FPGAs 140 7.1 Introduction 140 7.2 High-Level Synthesis 141 7.3 Xilinx Vivado 143 7.4 Control Logic Extraction Phase Example 144 7.5 Altera SDK for OpenCL 145 7.6 Other HLS Tools 147 7.7 Conclusions 150 Bibliography 150 8 Architecture Derivation for FPGA-based DSP Systems 152 8.1 Introduction 152 8.2 DSP Algorithm Characteristics 153 8.3 DSP Algorithm Representations 157 8.4 Pipelining DSP Systems 160 8.5 Parallel Operation 170 8.6 Conclusions 178 Bibliography 179 9 Complex DSP Core Design for FPGA 180 9.1 Introduction 180 9.2 Motivation for Design for Reuse 181 9.3 Intellectual Property Cores 182 9.4 Evolution of IP Cores 184 9.5 Parameterizable (Soft) IP Cores 187 9.6 IP Core Integration 195 9.7 Current FPGA-based IP Cores 197 9.8 Watermarking IP 198 9.9 Summary 198 Bibliography 199 10 AdvancedModel-Based FPGA Accelerator Design 200 10.1 Introduction 200 10.2 Dataflow Modeling of DSP Systems 201 10.3 Architectural Synthesis of Custom Circuit Accelerators from DFGs 204 10.4 Model-Based Development of Multi-Channel Dataflow Accelerators 205 10.5 Model-Based Development for Memory-Intensive Accelerators 219 10.6 Summary 223 References 223 11 Adaptive Beamformer Example 225 11.1 Introduction to Adaptive Beamforming 226 11.2 Generic Design Process 226 11.3 Algorithm to Architecture 231 11.4 Efficient Architecture Design 235 11.5 Generic QR Architecture 240 11.6 Retiming the Generic Architecture 246 11.7 Parameterizable QR Architecture 253 11.8 Generic Control 266 11.9 Beamformer Design Example 269 11.10 Summary 271 References 271 12 FPGA Solutions for Big Data Applications 273 12.1 Introduction 273 12.2 Big Data 274 12.3 Big Data Analytics 275 12.4 Acceleration 280 12.5 k-Means Clustering FPGA Implementation 283 12.6 FPGA-Based Soft Processors 286 12.7 System Hardware 290 12.8 Conclusions 293 Bibliography 293 13 Low-Power FPGA Implementation 296 13.1 Introduction 296 13.2 Sources of Power Consumption 297 13.3 FPGA Power Consumption 300 13.4 Power Consumption Reduction Techniques 302 13.5 Dynamic Voltage Scaling in FPGAs 303 13.6 Reduction in Switched Capacitance 305 13.7 Final Comments 316 Bibliography 317 14 Conclusions 319 14.1 Introduction 319 14.2 Evolution in FPGA Design Approaches 320 14.3 Big Data and the Shift toward Computing 320 14.4 Programming Flow for FPGAs 321 14.5 Support for Floating-Point Arithmetic 322 14.6 Memory Architectures 322 Bibliography 323 Index 325

Read more less

Book SynopsisEnergy Harvesting Wireless Communications offers a review of the most current research as well as the basic concepts, key ideas and powerful tools of energy harvesting wireless communications. Energy harvesting is both renewable and cheap and has the potential for many applications in future wireless communication systems to power transceivers by utilizing environmental energy such as solar, thermal, wind, and kinetic energy. The authorsnoted experts in the fieldexplore the power allocation for point-to-point energy harvesting channels, power allocation for multi-node energy harvesting channels, and cross-layer design for energy harvesting links. In addition, they offer an in-depth examination of energy harvesting network optimization and cover topics such as energy harvesting ad hoc networks, cost aware design for energy harvesting assisted cellular networks, and energy harvesting in next generation cellular networks.Table of Contents1 Introduction 1 1.1 Energy Harvesting Models and Constraints 1 1.2 Structure of the Book 3 Part I Energy Harvesting Wireless Transmission 5 2 Power Allocation for Point-to-Point Energy Harvesting Channels 7 2.1 A General Utility Optimization Framework for Point-to-Point EH Channels 8 2.2 Throughput Maximization for Gaussian Channel with EH Transmitter 9 2.2.1 The Case with Noncausal ESIT 10 2.2.1.1 Staircase Power Allocation to Problem (2.7) 10 2.2.1.2 Efficient Algorithm to Solve Problem (12.7) 11 2.2.2 The Case with Causal ESIT 15 2.2.2.1 Dynamic Programming 15 2.3 Throughput Maximization for Fading Channel with EH Transmitter 17 2.3.1 The Case with Noncausal CSIT and ESIT 18 2.3.1.1 Water-Filling Power Allocation 18 2.3.1.2 Staircase Water-Filling Power Allocation 19 2.3.1.3 Efficient Implementation of Staircase Water-Filling Algorithm 22 2.3.2 The Case with Causal CSIT and ESIT 23 2.3.2.1 Dynamic Programming 24 2.3.2.2 Heuristic Online Solutions 27 2.3.3 Other ESIT and CSIT Cases 27 2.4 Outage Probability Minimization with EH Transmitter 29 2.4.1 The Case with No CSIT and Noncausal ESIT 29 2.4.1.1 Properties of Outage Probability Function 30 2.4.1.2 Optimal Offline Power Allocation with M = 1 33 2.4.1.3 Suboptimal Power Allocation with M = 1 35 2.4.1.4 Optimal Power Allocation for the General Case of M > 1 36 2.4.1.5 Suboptimal Offline Power Allocation with M > 1 40 2.4.2 The Case with No CSIT and Causal ESIT 41 2.4.2.1 Optimal Online Power Allocation 42 2.4.2.2 Suboptimal Online Power Allocation 43 2.4.3 Numerical Results 44 2.4.3.1 The Case of M = 1 44 2.4.3.2 The Case of M > 1 44 2.4.4 Other CSIT and ESIT Cases 47 2.5 Limited Battery Storage 48 2.5.1 Throughput Maximization over Gaussian Channel with Noncausal ESIT 48 2.5.2 Throughput Maximization over Fading Channels with Noncausal CSIT and ESIT 52 2.5.3 Other Cases 55 2.6 Imperfect Circuits 56 2.6.1 Practical Power Consumption for Wireless Transmitters 56 2.6.2 The Case with Noncausal ESIT 58 2.6.2.1 Problem Reformulation 59 2.6.2.2 Single-Block Case with M = 1 60 2.6.2.3 General Multi-Block Case with M ≥ 1 61 2.6.3 The Case with Causal ESIT 64 2.7 Power Allocation with EH Receiver 66 2.7.1 Power Consumption Model for a Wireless Receiver 66 2.7.2 The Case with Only EH Receiver 68 2.7.3 The Case with Both EH Transmitter and EH Receiver 70 2.8 Summary 70 3 Power Allocation for Multi-node Energy Harvesting Channels 75 3.1 Multiple-Access Channels 75 3.1.1 System Model 75 3.1.2 Problem Formulation 76 3.1.3 The Optimal Offline Scheme 78 3.1.4 Optimal Sum Power Allocation 78 3.1.4.1 Optimal Rate Scheduling 80 3.1.5 The Online Scheme 84 3.1.5.1 Competitive Analysis 84 3.1.5.2 The Greedy Scheme 85 3.1.6 Numerical Results 87 3.2 Relay Channels 91 3.2.1 System Model 92 3.2.2 Problem Formulation 94 3.2.2.1 Delay-Constrained Case 94 3.2.2.2 No-Delay-Constrained Case 95 3.2.3 Optimal Solution for the Delay-Constrained Case 97 3.2.3.1 Monotonic Power Allocation 97 3.2.3.2 The Case with Direct Link 99 3.2.3.3 The Case Without Direct Link 104 3.2.4 Optimal Solution for the No-Delay-Constrained Case 106 3.2.4.1 Optimal Source Power Allocation 106 3.2.4.2 Optimal Relay Power Allocation 109 3.2.4.3 Optimal Rate Scheduling 111 3.2.4.4 Throughput Comparison: DC versus NDC 112 3.2.5 Numerical Results 113 3.3 Large Relay Networks 115 3.3.1 System Model and Assumptions 115 3.3.2 Average Throughput for Threshold-Based Transmissions 117 3.3.2.1 Threshold-Based Transmission 117 3.3.2.2 Markov Property of the Transmission Scheme 118 3.3.3 Transmission Threshold Optimization 120 3.3.3.1 Convexification via Randomization 120 3.3.3.2 State-DependentThreshold Optimization 122 3.3.3.3 State-Oblivious Transmission Threshold 123 3.3.4 Numerical Results 124 3.4 Summary 125 4 Cross-Layer Design for Energy Harvesting Links 127 4.1 Introduction 127 4.2 Completion Time and Delay Minimization 128 4.2.1 Completion Time Minimization 128 4.2.1.1 Offline Optimum 129 4.2.1.2 Online Settings 130 4.2.1.3 Preliminaries on Competitive Analysis 131 4.2.2 A 2-Competitive Online Algorithm 131 4.2.3 Game-Theoretic Analysis on the Completion Time Minimization 134 4.2.3.1 The Action Set of the Nature 134 4.2.3.2 The Action Set of the Transmitter 136 4.2.3.3 Two-Person Zero-Sum Game 137 4.2.3.4 Discussions 140 4.2.4 Delay-Optimal Energy Management 142 4.2.4.1 Formulation 142 4.2.4.2 Offline Analysis 142 4.2.4.3 Online Analysis 143 4.3 Traffic-Aware Base Station Sleeping in Renewable Energy-Powered Cellular Networks 144 4.3.1 System Model of a Renewable Energy-Powered Cellular Network 144 4.3.1.1 Power Consumption Model 144 4.3.1.2 Traffic Model 145 4.3.1.3 Channel Model 146 4.3.2 Blocking Probability Analysis 147 4.3.2.1 Service Blocking Probability 147 4.3.2.2 Relation Between P(b)G and ;;(b) 149 4.3.2.3 Overall Blocking Probability 149 4.3.3 Power Grid Energy Minimization 150 4.3.3.1 Problem Formulation 150 4.3.3.2 Optimal DP Algorithm 151 4.3.3.3 Two-Stage DP Algorithm 153 4.3.3.4 Heuristic Algorithms 155 4.3.4 Numerical Simulations 156 4.3.4.1 Single-Cell Case 157 4.3.4.2 3-Sector Case 158 4.4 Summary 163 Part II Energy Harvesting Network Optimization 167 5 Energy Harvesting Ad Hoc Networks 169 5.1 Distributed Opportunistic Scheduling 169 5.1.1 System Model 169 5.1.2 Transmission Scheduling 171 5.1.2.1 Problem Formulation 171 5.1.2.2 Optimal Stopping Rule for Constant EH Model 175 5.1.2.3 Optimal Stopping Rule for i.i.d. EH Model 179 5.1.3 Battery Dynamics 180 5.1.3.1 Battery with Constant EH Model 180 5.1.3.2 Battery with i.i.d. EH Model 183 5.1.4 Computation of the Optimal Throughput 184 5.1.5 Numerical Results 184 5.2 Multiuser Gain Analysis 187 5.2.1 System Model 187 5.2.2 Centralized Access 188 5.2.2.1 Fixed TDMA 189 5.2.2.2 Energy-Greedy Access 191 5.2.3 Distributed Access 196 5.2.4 Numerical Analysis and Discussions 199 5.3 Summary 200 6 Cost-Aware Design for Energy Harvesting Powered Cellular Networks 203 6.1 Introduction 203 6.2 Energy Supply and Demand of Cellular Systems 205 6.3 Energy Cooperation 207 6.3.1 Aggregator-Assisted Energy Trading 207 6.3.2 Aggregator-Assisted Energy Sharing 208 6.4 Communication Cooperation 209 6.4.1 Cost-Aware Traffic Offloading 210 6.4.2 Cost-Aware Spectrum Sharing 210 6.4.3 Cost-Aware Coordinated Multipoint (CoMP) 211 6.5 Joint Energy and Communication Cooperation 211 6.5.1 A Case Study 212 6.6 Joint Aggregator-Assisted Energy Trading and CoMP 214 6.7 Joint Aggregator-Assisted Energy Sharing and CoMP 226 6.7.1 System Model 226 6.7.2 Optimal Solution 230 6.7.3 Numerical Results 232 6.8 Extensions and Future Directions 235 6.9 Summary 236 7 Energy Harvesting in Next-Generation Cellular Networks 239 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Energy Harvesting Hyper-cellular Networks 240 7.2.1 System Model 240 7.2.1.1 HCNs with Hybrid Energy Supply 240 7.2.1.2 Traffic and Channel Model 241 7.2.1.3 Power Consumption Model 242 7.2.1.4 Green Energy Supply Model 243 7.2.2 Analysis of Power Supply and Demand 244 7.2.2.1 Energy Queue Analysis 244 7.2.2.2 Outage Probability Analysis 245 7.2.3 Optimization in the Single-SBS Case 248 7.2.3.1 Single HSBS 248 7.2.3.2 Single-RSBS Case 250 7.2.4 Optimization in the Multi-SBS Case 253 7.2.4.1 Problem Formulation 253 7.2.4.2 SBS Reactivation and TEATO Scheme 254 7.2.5 Simulation Results 255 7.2.5.1 Power Saving Gain of the Single-SBS Case 255 7.2.5.2 Network Power Saving Gain 257 7.3 Proactive Content Caching and Push with Energy Harvesting-Based Small Cells 259 7.3.1 Network Architecture and Proactive Service Provisioning 260 7.3.1.1 Exploiting the Content and Energy Timeliness 261 7.3.1.2 Energy Harvesting-Based Caching and Push: A Simple Policy Design Example 263 7.3.2 Policy Optimization for Content Push 265 7.3.2.1 Model for Content Push at the Energy Harvesting-Based SBS 266 7.3.2.2 Optimal Policy with Finite Battery Capacity 268 7.3.2.3 MDP Problem Formulation and Optimization 269 7.3.2.4 Threshold-Based Policies 272 7.3.2.5 Numerical Results 279 7.4 Summary 283 Part III Appendices 287 A Convex Optimization 289 B Markov Decision Process 297 C Optimal Stopping Theory 307 Index 315

Read more less

Book SynopsisTelecommunication Services provides aholistic approach to understand telecommunications systems by addressing the emergence and domination of new digital services, consumer and economic dynamics, and the creation of content by service providers. Includes services, underlying technologies, and internal capabilities for social network advertising Covers market dynamics that determine the successes and failures of service offerings Discusses the impact of smartphones (iPhone launch) on the telecommunications and mobile device industry Table of ContentsForeword xiVinton G. Cerf Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv List of Contributors xvii 1. The Evolving Voice Services: From Circuit Switching to Voice-Over LTE/FTTH) 1 1.1 Customer Need: Remote Communication 1 1.2 FTTH Voice 2 1.3 Voice-Over LTE (VoLTE) 2 1.4 Voice-Over WiFi 4 1.5 High-Definition (HD) Voice 5 1.6 Over-the-Top Substitutes 5 2. Internet Services: From Broadband to Ultrabroadband 9 2.1 Customer Need: Connectivity and Social Inclusion 10 2.2 Fixed Lines: Deploying Fiber Closer to Customer Premises: xDSL, Cable, FTTH 11 2.3 Mobile: 4G LTE/LTE-Advanced 19 2.4 WiFi AC (Gigabit) 23 2.5 Universal Access 23 3. Convergence: Bundling Fixed Line and Mobile Services 31 3.1 Customer Need: One-Stop Shop 31 3.2 Fixed Line and Mobile Service Bundles 31 3.3 Integrated Operators 32 4. Devices: Smartphones 37 4.1 Customer Need: Mobility 37 4.2 Vendors 38 4.3 Operating System Duopoly 39 4.4 Hardware Specifications 40 5. The Evolving Pay TV 51Francisco Saez and Joaquín M. Lopez Muñoz 5.1 Customer Need: Entertainment 51 5.2 Content Wars 53 5.3 Aggregation versus Diversity 56 5.4 The Role of Advertising 57 5.5 Technology: Satellite, Cable, and IPTV 58 5.6 Pay TV Technicall Key Components 58 5.7 Evolution of Interactive Pay TV Technologies 60 5.8 Video Definition 64 6. Enterprise: From Machine-to-Machine Connectivity Toward Internet of Things 69 6.1 Customer Need: Remote Automation 70 6.2 Basic Connectivity and Managed Connectivity 71 6.3 Low-Power Wide Area: LTE-MTC and Alternatives 77 6.4 Applications: Toward Internet of Things 86 7. IT: Cloud 103Stefan Wesner 7.1 Global Trends Driving the Cloud Evolution 104 7.2 Virtualization as Enabling Technology 105 7.3 The Layered Cloud Model 106 7.4 Advanced Cloud Models 111 7.5 Future Cloud Models 113 7.6 Conclusion and Summary 115 8. Emerging Markets: Mobile Money for the Unbanked 117 8.1 Customer Need: Remote Payments 117 8.2 Large Unbanked Population in Emerging Markets 118 8.3 Very High Penetration of Mobile Based on Feature Phones 129 8.4 Services: Remittances and Payments 137 9. Value-Added Consumer Services 143Jesus Llamazares Alberola 9.1 Introduction 143 9.2 Disruption is the New “Karma” 143 9.3 Adjacent Industries Joining Multilayered Value Chain 145 9.4 Telco’s Role and Challenges in the New Paradigm 146 9.5 But What do we Understand by VAS Today? 148 9.6 So What’s the Future for VAS and, Thus, for Telcos? 152 10. Mobile Virtual Network Operators/Second Brands 155Jaime Bustillo 10.1 From Oligopoly to Marketplace 156 10.2 MVNO Ecosystem: End Customer Facing or MVNOs 157 10.3 MVNO Ecosystem: Technology Enablers, MVNE, and MVNA 160 11. Digital Home 163 11.1 Introduction to Home Automation 163 11.2 Evolution to Digital Home 165 11.3 Home Automation: Control Network 170 11.4 Digital Home Networks 179 12. Videoconference and Telework 185 12.1 Customer Need: Teletransport 185 12.2 Videoconference 186 12.3 Telework 195 Index 205

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsForeword by Aruna Sundararajan xix Foreword by Rainer Deutschmann xxi Preface xxiii Acknowledgements xxv List of Abbreviations xxvii 1 Overview of Mobile Networks 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Mobile Network Evolution 2 1.3 Information Theory 4 1.4 Second‐generation Mobile Network 8 1.5 Third‐generation Mobile Networks 13 1.6 Fourth‐generation Mobile Networks 17 1.7 Fifth‐generation Networks 19 1.8 Supporting Technologies 20 Part I: 2G GSM and EGPRS Network Planning and Optimisation 27 2 Radio Network Planning and Optimisation 29 2.1 Basics of Radio Network Planning 29 2.2 Radio Network Planning Process 32 2.3 Radio Network Pre‐planning 38 2.4 Radio Network Detailed Planning 40 2.5 Basics of Radio Network Optimisation 59 2.6 GPRS Network Planning and Optimisation 66 2.7 Network Planning in a GPRS Network 71 2.8 GPRS Detailed Radio Network Planning 74 2.9 GPRS Radio Network Optimisation 76 2.10 EDGE Network Planning and Optimisation 77 2.11 EDGE Radio Network Planning Process 78 2.12 Radio Network Planning Process 80 2.13 EDGE Radio Network Optimisation 84 2.14 Conclusions 86 3 Transmission Network Planning and Optimisation 87 3.1 Basics of Transmission Network Planning 87 3.2 Transmission Network Planning Process 89 3.3 Transmission Pre‐planning 90 3.4 Detailed Transmission Network Planning 107 3.5 Transmission Network Optimisation 117 3.6 GPRS Transmission Network Planning and Optimisation 123 3.7 EDGE Transmission Network Planning 123 4 Core Network Planning and Optimisation 133 4.1 Basics of Core Network Planning 133 4.2 Core Network Planning Process 134 4.3 Basics of Signalling 140 4.4 Intelligent Network (IN) 141 4.5 Failure Analysis and Protection 142 4.6 Detailed Planning 144 4.7 Core Network Optimisation 145 4.8 GPRS Core Network Planning 149 4.9 EDGE Core Network Planning 154 Part II: 3G UMTS Network Planning and Optimisation 155 5 3G Radio Network Planning and Optimisation 157 5.1 Basics of Radio Network Planning 157 5.2 Radio Interface Protocol Architecture 161 5.3 Spreading Phenomenon 164 5.4 Multipath Propagation 166 5.5 Radio Network Planning Process 167 5.6 Detailed Planning 178 5.7 High Speed Packet Access 181 5.8 WCDMA Radio Network Optimisation 186 6 3G Transmission Network Planning and Optimisation 195 6.1 Basics of 3G (WCDMA) Transmission Network Planning 195 6.2 Transmission Network Planning Process 198 6.3 Asynchronous Transfer Mode 198 6.4 Dimensioning 203 6.5 Microwave Link Planning 206 6.6 Detailed Planning 208 6.7 Ethernet Radio 215 6.8 3G WCDMA Transmission Network Optimisation 217 7 3G Core Network Planning and Optimisation 223 7.1 Basics of Core Network Planning 223 7.2 Core Network Planning Process 224 7.3 Detailed Network Planning 228 7.4 Core Network Optimisation 232 7.5 End‐to‐End Quality of Service 233 Part III: 4G LTE Network Planning and Optimisation 235 8 4G Radio Network Planning and Optimisation 237 8.1 Basics of Radio Network Planning 237 8.2 LTE Air Interface 239 8.3 LTE Frame Structure 240 8.4 LTE Protocol Stack 242 8.5 LTE Channel Structure 244 8.6 Multiple Input Multiple Output Antenna Technique 247 8.7 Network Elements in a LTE Radio Network 248 8.8 Key Phenomena in LTE 249 8.9 Radio Network Planning Process 251 8.10 LTE Radio Network Optimisation 259 8.11 LTE Advanced 264 9 4G Core Network Planning and Optimisation 267 9.1 Introduction 267 9.2 Basics of EPC Network Planning 267 9.3 EPC Network Planning: Key Concepts 270 9.4 EPC Network Dimensioning 272 9.5 Detailed EPC Network Planning: Key Concepts 273 9.6 IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) 276 9.7 Voice‐Flow in LTE 287 9.8 Software Defined Network (SDN) 288 9.9 Network Function Virtualisation (NFV) 291 9.10 Virtualising Network Functions 291 Part IV: 5G Introduction to 5G Network Planning and Optimisation 295 10 5G Network Planning 297 10.1 Introduction to 5G 297 10.2 The 5G Challenge 298 10.3 5G Network Architecture 299 10.4 5G Enabling Technologies 303 10.5 5G Radio and Core Network 305 10.6 5G Spectrum 308 10.7 Network Planning Consideration in 5G 311 Appendix A IoT (Internet of Things) 315Jeevan Talegaonkar A.1 Introduction 315 A.2 Types of IoT 317 A.3 IoT Use Cases 318 A.4 IoT Value Chain 322 A.5 Phases of IoT Maturity 323 Appendix B Introduction to MIMO and Massive MIMO 325Swapnaja Deshpande B.1 Introduction 325 B.2 Multi‐user MIMO 326 B.3 Spatial Multiplexing of Deterministic MIMO Channels 329 B.4 MIMO performance improvements 331 B.5 Massive MIMO 333 Appendix C Blockchain Technology 337Priyanka Ray C.1 Overview 337 C.2 Distributed Ledger Technology (DLT) 337 C.3 What Is Blockchain? 338 C.4 Blockchain Versus Database 341 C.5 Telcos in Blockchain 342 C.6 Blockchain in Other Industries 342 C.7 Bitcoin 343 C.8 Benefits of Blockchain 345 C.9 Challenges of Blockchain 346 Appendix D 3GPP Releases 347Guninder Preet Singh D.1 Introduction 347 D.2 Release 8 347 D.3 Release 9 349 D.4 Release 10 349 D.5 Release 11 350 D.6 Release 12 350 D.7 Release 13 351 D.8 Release 14 351 D.9 Release 15 and Future Releases 352 Appendix E A Synopsis on Radio Spectrum Management 353Ramy Ahmed Fathy and Asit Kadayan E.1 Introduction to Spectrum 353 E.2 Spectrum Management 353 E.3 Role of National Administrations in Spectrum Management 355 E.4 The International Frequency Allocation Table 356 E.5 Spectrum Bands and Their Impact on the User 359 E.6 NFAP (National Frequency Allocation Plan): India 360 E.7 Efficient Use of Spectrum 362 E.8 Future Needs of Spectrum 362 Appendix F Artificial Intelligence 365Pieter Geldenhuys F.1 Machine Learning 365 F.2 The History of Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 365 F.3 Artificial Intelligence is about Statistical Relationships, not Cause and Effect Relationships 367 F.4 Artificial Intelligence Created User Behaviour Mapping Versus Traditional Market Research 368 F.5 Artificial Intelligence Created User Behaviour Mapping Versus Narrative Inquiry 368 F.6 The New Digital Ecosystem and Future of Artificial Intelligence 368 F.7 The Role of Machine Learning: Headlines from the Future 369 F.8 Conclusion 372 Bibliography 372 Appendix G Erlang B Tables 373 Bibliography 383 Index 389

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book in the field to incorporate fundamentals of energy systems and their applications to smart grid, along with advanced topics in modeling and control This book provides an overview of how multiple sources and loads are connected via power electronic devices. Issues of storage technologies are discussed, and a comparison summary is given to facilitate the design and selection of storage types. The need for real-time measurement and controls are pertinent in future grid, and this book dedicates several chapters to real-time measurements such as PMU, smart meters, communication scheme, and protocol and standards for processing and controls of energy options. Organized into nine sections, Energy Processing for the Smart Grid gives an introduction to the energy processing concepts/topics needed by students in electrical engineering or non-electrical engineering who need to work in areas of future grid development. It covers such modern topics as renewable energy, storage tecTable of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xiii FOREWORD xv CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Introduction 1 Bibliography 4 CHAPTER 2 ELECTRIC NETWORK ANALYSIS IN ENERGY PROCESSING AND SMART GRID 5 2.1 Introduction 5 2.2 Complex Power Concepts 5 2.3 Review of AC-Circuit Analysis Using Phasor Diagrams 8 2.4 Polyphase Systems 9 2.5 Three-Phase Loads with Impedence Loads 13 2.6 Transformation of Y to Delta and Delta to Y 17 2.7 Summary of Phase and Line Voltages/Currents for Balanced Three-Phase Systems 19 2.8 Per-Unit Systems 22 2.9 Chapter Summary 27 Exercises 27 Bibliography 29 CHAPTER 3 MAGNETIC SYSTEMS FOR ENERGY PROCESSING 31 3.1 Introduction 31 3.2 Magnetic Fields 31 3.3 Equivalent Magnetic and Electric Circuits 34 3.4 Overview of Magnetic Materials 35 3.5 Hysteresis Loops and Hysteresis Losses in Ferromagnetic Materials 35 3.6 Definitions 38 3.7 Magnetic Circuit Losses 38 3.8 Producing Magnetic Flux in Air Gap 40 3.9 Rectangular-Shaped Magnetic Circuits 41 3.10 Chapter Summary 45 Exercises 45 Bibliography 47 CHAPTER 4 TRANSFORMERS 49 4.1 Introduction 49 4.2 First Two Maxwell’s Laws 50 4.3 Transformers 51 4.4 Ideal Single-Phase Transformer Models 56 4.5 Modeling a Transformer into Equivalent Circuits 59 4.6 Transformer Testing 65 4.7 Transformer Specifications 71 4.8 Three-Phase Power Transformers 72 4.9 New Advances in Transformer Technology: Solid-State Transformers 72 4.10 Chapter Summary 78 Exercises 78 Bibliography 82 CHAPTER 5 INDUCTION MACHINES 83 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 Construction and Types of Induction Motors 83 5.3 Operating Principle 85 5.4 Basic Induction-Motor Concepts 86 5.5 Induction-Motor Slip 88 5.6 Rotor Current and Leakage Reactance 88 5.7 Rotor Copper Loss 91 5.8 Developing the Equivalent Circuit of Polyphase, Wound-Rotor Induction Motors 92 5.9 Computing Corresponding Torque of Induction Motors 96 5.10 Approximation Model for Induction Machines 97 5.11 Speed Control of Induction Motors 100 5.12 Application of Induction Motors 101 5.13 induction-Generator Principles 101 5.14 Chapter Summary 103 Exercises 104 Bibliography 106 CHAPTER 6 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 107 6.1 Introduction 107 6.2 Synchronous-Generator Construction 107 6.3 Exciters 108 6.4 Governors 110 6.5 Synchronous Generator Operating Principle 110 6.6 Equivalent Circuit of Synchronous Machines 112 6.7 Synchronous Generator Equivalent Circuits 113 6.8 Over Excitation and Under Excitation 114 6.9 Open-Circuit and Short-Circuit Characteristics 115 6.10 Performance Characteristics of Synchronous Machines 118 6.11 Generator Compounding Curve 122 6.12 Synchronous Generator Operating Alone: Concept of Infinite Bus 122 6.13 Initial Elementary Facts about Synchronous Machines 123 6.14 Cylindrical-Rotor Machines for Turbo Generators 125 6.15 Synchronous Machines with Effects of Saliency: Two-Reactance Theory 125 6.16 The Salient-Pole Machine 126 6.17 Synchronous Motors 128 6.18 Synchronous Machines and System Stability 131 6.19 Chapter Summary 135 Exercises 136 Bibliography 137 CHAPTER 7 DC MACHINES 139 7.1 Introduction 139 7.2 Conductor Moving in a Uniform Magnetic Field 139 7.3 Current-Carrying Conductor in a Uniform Magnetic Field 139 7.4 DC-Machine Construction and Nameplate Parameters 141 7.5 DC Machine Pertinent Nameplate Parameters 142 7.6 Development and Configuration of Equivalent Circuits of DC Machines 142 7.7 Classification of DC Machines 147 7.8 Voltage Regulation 151 7.9 Power Computation for DC Machines 151 7.10 Power Flow and Efficiency 152 7.11 DC Motors 155 7.12 Computation of Speed of DC Motors 155 7.13 DC-Machine Speed-Control Methods 163 7.14 Ward Leonard System 164 7.15 Chapter Summary 166 Exercises 167 Bibliography 168 CHAPTER 8 PERMANENT-MAGNET MOTORS 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Permanent-Magnet DC Motors 169 8.3 Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors 177 8.4 Variants of Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors 186 8.5 Chapter Summary 190 Bibliography 190 CHAPTER 9 RENEWABLE ENERGY RESOURCES 193 9.1 Introduction 193 9.2 Distributed Generation Concepts 193 9.3 DG Benefits 194 9.4 Working Definitions and Classifications of Renewable Energy 195 9.5 Renewable-Energy Penetration 218 9.6 Maximum Penetration Limits of Renewable-Energy Resources 218 9.7 Constraints to Implementation of Renewable Energy 219 Exercises 221 Bibliography 222 CHAPTER 10 STORAGE SYSTEMS IN THE SMART GRID 223 10.1 Introduction 223 10.2 Forms of Energy 223 10.3 Energy Storage Systems 223 10.4 Cost Benefits of Storage 239 10.5 Chapter Summary 244 Bibliography 244 CHAPTER 11 POWER ELECTRONICS 247 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Power Systems with Power Electronics Architecture 248 11.3 Elements of Power Electronics 249 11.4 Power Semiconductor Devices 249 11.5 Applications of Power Electronics Devices to Machine Control 276 11.6 Applications of Power Electronics Devices to Power System Devices 280 11.7 Applications of Power Electronics to Utility, Aerospace, and Shipping 281 11.8 Facts 282 11.9 Chapter Summary 286 Bibliography 287 CHAPTER 12 CONVERTERS AND INVERTERS 289 12.1 Introduction 289 12.2 Definitions 289 12.3 DC–DC Converters 290 12.4 Inverters 296 12.5 Rectifiers 301 12.6 Applications 312 12.7 Chapter Summary 320 Exercises 320 Bibliography 322 CHAPTER 13 MICROGRID APPLICATION DESIGN AND TECHNOLOGY 323 13.1 Introduction to Microgrids 323 13.2 Types of Microgrids 324 13.3 Microgrid Architecture 325 13.4 Modeling of a Microgrid 330 13.5 Chapter Summary 332 Bibliography 333 CHAPTER 14 MICROGRID OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 335 14.1 Perfomance Tools of a Microgrid 335 14.2 Microgrid Functions 337 14.3 IEEE Standards for Microgrids 344 14.4 Microgrid Benefits 346 14.5 Chapter Summary 349 Bibliography 349 CHAPTER 15 THE SMART GRID: AN INTRODUCTION 351 15.1 Evolution, Drivers, and the Need for Smart Grid 351 15.2 Comparison of Smart Grid with the Current Grid System 352 15.3 Architecture of a Smart Grid 353 15.4 Design for Smart-Grid Function for Bulk Power Systems 353 15.5 Smart-Grid Challenges 362 15.6 Design Structure and Procedure for Smart-Grid Best Practices 363 15.7 Chapter Summary 365 Bibliography 365 CHAPTER 16 SMART-GRID LAYERS AND CONTROL 367 16.1 Introduction 367 16.2 Controls for the Smart Grid 367 16.3 Layers of Smart Grid Within the Grid 373 16.4 Command, Control, and Communication Applications in Real Time 390 16.5 Hardware-in-the-Loop for Energy Processing and the Smart Grid 394 16.6 Evolution of Cyber-Physical Systems 394 16.7 Chapter Summary 396 Bibliography 397 CHAPTER 17 ENERGY PROCESSING AND SMART-GRID TEST BEDS 401 17.1 Introduction 401 17.2 Study of Available Test Beds for the Smart Grid 401 17.3 Smart Microgrid Test-Bed Design 403 17.4 Smart-Grid Test Beds 404 17.5 Smart-Grid Case Studies 405 17.6 Simulation Tools, Hardware, and Embedded Systems 408 17.7 Limitations of Existing Smart-Grid Test Beds 411 17.8 Chapter Summary 412 Bibliography 412 INDEX 415

Read more less

Book SynopsisMutual Coupling Between Antennas A guide to mutual coupling between various types of antennas in arrays such as wires, apertures and microstrip patches or antennas co-sited on platformsMutual Coupling Between Antennas explores the theoretical underpinnings of mutual coupling, offers an up-to-date description of the physical effects of mutual coupling for a variety of antennas, and contains techniques for analysing and assessing its effects. The book puts the topic in historical context, presents an integral equation approach, includes the current techniques, measurement methods, and discusses the most recent advances in the field. With contributions from noted experts on the topic, the book reviews practical aspects of mutual coupling and examines applications that clearly demonstrate where the performance is impacted both positively and negatively. Mutual Coupling Between Antennas contains information on how mutual coupling can be analysed with a wide range of methods from direct coTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xvii List of Contributors xix Notation xxi 1 Introduction 1 Trevor S. Bird 1.1 Aims and Scope 1 1.2 Historical Perspective 3 1.3 Overview of Text 4 References 7 2 Basics of Antenna Mutual Coupling 9 Trevor S. Bird 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Electromagnetic Field Quantities 9 2.2.1 Definitions 9 2.2.2 Field Representations in Source-Free Regions 11 2.3 Mutual Coupling Between Elementary Sources 12 2.3.1 Radiation 12 2.3.2 Generalized Infinitesimal Current Elements 14 2.3.3 Mutual Coupling Between Infinitesimal Current Elements 15 2.4 Network Representation of Mutual Coupling 18 2.4.1 Extension to Combination of Elements 18 2.4.2 Mutual Impedance and Admittance Matrix Formulation 19 2.4.3 Scattering Matrix Representation 20 2.5 Radiation from Antennas in the Presence of Mutual Coupling 23 2.5.1 Far-Field Radiation 23 2.5.2 Magnetic Current Only 25 2.5.3 Electric Current Only 25 2.6 Conclusion 26 References 26 3 Methods in the Analysis of Mutual Coupling in Antennas 27 Trevor S. Bird 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Mutual Coupling in Antennas with Continuous Sources 30 3.2.1 Impedance and Admittance with Continuous Sources 30 3.2.2 Reaction 31 3.2.3 Definition of Circuit Quantities 32 3.3 On Finite and Infinite Arrays 34 3.3.1 Finite Array Analysis by Element-by-Element Method 35 3.3.2 Infinite Periodic Array Analysis 36 3.4 Integral Equation Methods Used in Coupling Analysis 36 3.4.1 Introduction 36 3.4.2 Green’s Function Methods 37 3.4.2.1 Free-Space Green’s Function for Harmonic Sources 38 3.4.2.2 Free-Space Green’s Function for Transient Sources 40 3.4.2.3 Fields with Sources 40 3.4.3 Solution by Weighted Residuals 43 3.5 Some Other Methods Used in Coupling Analysis 46 3.5.1 Unit Cell Analysis in Periodic Structure Method 46 3.5.2 Mode Matching Methods 51 3.5.3 Moment Methods 52 3.5.4 Method of Characteristic Modes 52 3.5.5 Minimum Scattering Element Method 53 3.6 Practical Aspects of Numerical Methods in Mutual Coupling Analysis 54 3.6.1 Introduction 54 3.6.2 Numerical Quadrature 55 3.6.3 Matrix Inversion 56 3.7 Conclusion 58 References 59 4 Mutual Coupling in Arrays of Wire Antennas 63 Trevor S. Bird 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Formulation of the Problem 63 4.2.1 Moment Method 66 4.2.2 Moment Method Solution for the Dipole 67 4.3 Mutual Impedance 68 4.3.1 Closed Form Expressions for Mutual Impedance 70 4.3.2 Asymptotic Approximations to Mutual Impedance 73 4.4 Arrays of Wire Antennas 76 4.4.1 Full-Wave Dipole Above a Perfect Ground 77 4.4.2 The Yagi–Uda Array 80 4.4.3 7 X 7 Array of Closely Packed Elements 83 4.5 Concluding Remarks 84 References 84 5 Arrays of Planar Aperture Antennas 87 Trevor S. Bird 5.1 Introduction 87 5.2 Mutual Coupling in Waveguide and Horn Arrays 88 5.2.1 Integral Equation Formulation 88 5.2.2 Modal Representation 91 5.2.3 Modeling of Profiled Horns and Mode Matching 94 5.2.4 Asymptotic Approximation of Mutual Admittance 97 5.3 Coupling in Rectangular Waveguides and Horns 99 5.3.1 Self-Admittance of TE 10 Mode 102 5.3.2 Example of Mutual Coupling Between Different-Sized Waveguides 104 5.3.3 Application to Horns 106 5.3.4 Waveguide-Fed Slot Arrays 111 5.3.5 Asymptotic Approximation of Coupling in Rectangular Apertures 112 5.3.6 Coupling in Horns Approximated with Quadratic Phase 114 5.4 Coupling in Arrays of Coaxial Waveguides and Horns 114 5.4.1 Self-Admittance of TE 11 Mode in Coaxial Waveguide 118 5.4.2 TEM Mode Coupling in Coaxial Waveguide 120 5.4.3 Asymptotic Approximation of Coupling in Coaxial Waveguide Apertures 123 5.4.4 Coaxial and Circular Aperture Array Examples 127 5.5 Mutual Coupling Between Apertures of General Cross-Section 129 5.5.1 Elliptical Apertures 129 5.5.2 General Apertures 134 5.6 Coupling in Apertures Loaded with Dielectrics and Metamaterials 135 5.6.1 Dielectric-Loaded Apertures 136 5.6.2 Metamaterial-Loaded Apertures 142 5.7 Concluding Remarks 148 References 148 6 Arrays of Microstrip Patch Antennas 153 Trevor S. Bird 6.1 Introduction 153 6.2 Representation of Mutual Coupling Between Patch Antennas 155 6.2.1 E-Current Model of Coupling 159 6.2.2 Cavity Model (H-Model) of Coupling 162 6.2.3 Full-Wave Solution 165 6.3 Applications of Microstrip Arrays 167 6.3.1 Mutual Coupling Between Microstrip Patches 167 6.3.2 Steering by Switching Parasitic Elements 167 6.3.3 A Metasurface from Microstrip Patches 170 6.4 Concluding Remarks 174 References 174 7 Mutual Coupling Between Antennas on Conformal Surfaces 177 Trevor S. Bird 7.1 Introduction 177 7.2 Mutual Admittance of Apertures on Slowly Curving Surfaces 178 7.2.1 Green’s Function Formulation for Curved Surfaces 178 7.2.2 The Cylinder 179 7.2.3 The Sphere 182 7.3 Asymptotic Solution for Fields Near Convex Surfaces 184 7.3.1 Review of Literature for Convex Surfaces 184 7.3.2 Asymptotic Solution for the Surface Fields 186 7.4 Mutual Coupling of Apertures in Quadric Surfaces 187 7.4.1 Closed-Form Expressions for Mutual Coupling Between Rectangular Waveguides in a Cylinder 188 7.4.2 Expressions for Mutual Coupling Between Circular Waveguides in a Sphere 194 7.4.3 Mutual Coupling Between Microstrip Patches on a Cylinder 197 7.5 Extension of Canonical Solution to Large Convex Surfaces with Slowly Varying Curvature 201 7.6 Applications of Coupling on Curved Surfaces 210 7.6.1 Mutual Coupling in a Waveguide Array on a Cylinder 210 7.6.2 Mutual Coupling Between Monopoles on a Cylinder 211 7.6.3 Mutual Coupling Between Waveguides on an Ellipsoid 215 7.7 Conclusion 216 References 217 8 Mutual Coupling Between Co-Sited Antennas and Antennas on Large Structures 221 Derek McNamara and Eqab Almajali 8.1 Preliminaries and Assumptions 221 8.1.1 The Problem at Hand 221 8.1.2 Course Adopted 223 8.2 Full-Wave CEM Modeling View of a Single Antenna 223 8.3 Full-Wave CEM Modeling View of Coupled Antennas in the Presence of a Host Platform 225 8.3.1 Field Point of View 225 8.3.2 Two-Port Network Parameter Point of View 227 8.4 Useful Expressions for Coupling in the Presence of a Host Platform 230 8.4.1 Motivation 230 8.4.2 Reciprocity and Reaction Theorems Revisited 230 8.4.3 Generalized Reaction Theorem 233 8.4.4 Expressions for Mutual Impedance and Open Circuit Voltage 234 8.4.5 Power Coupling 235 8.5 Supplementary Comments on CEM Modeling Methods 236 8.6 Full-Wave CEM Modeling of Coupled Antennas on a Platform – The Ideal 243 8.7 Reduced Complexity Antenna Electromagnetic Models 244 8.7.1 Necessity for Simplified Antenna Models 244 8.7.2 Huygens’ Box Model 244 8.7.3 Spherical Wave Expansion Models 246 8.7.4 Infinitesimal Dipole Models 246 8.7.5 Planar Aperture Models 247 8.7.6 Point Source Models 247 8.8 CEM Modeling of Coupled Antennas on a Platform – Pragmatic Approaches 247 8.9 Co-Sited Antenna Coupling Computation Examples 249 8.10 Concluding Remarks 251 References 251 9 Mutual Coupling and Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) Communications 257 Karl F. Warnick 9.1 Introduction 257 9.2 Previous Work on Mutual Coupling and MIMO 258 9.3 Basics of MIMO Communications 260 9.3.1 MIMO Channel Capacity 261 9.3.2 Eigenchannels and the Water-Filling Solution 261 9.3.3 Eigenchannels in MIMO Systems and Beamforming Arrays 262 9.3.4 Reference Planes and the Intrinsic Channel Matrix 263 9.4 Mutual Coupling and MIMO Transmitting Arrays 264 9.4.1 Radiated Electric Field and Embedded Element Patterns 265 9.4.2 Pattern Overlap Matrix, Conservation of Energy, and Mutual Coupling 266 9.4.3 Gain and Directivity in the Overlap Matrix Formulation 267 9.4.4 Overlap Matrix for Isotropic Radiators 268 9.4.5 Mutual Coupling for Closely Spaced Elements, Superdirectivity, and Q-Factor Bounds 268 9.4.6 EEPs, Mutual Coupling, and Minimum Scattering Antennas 269 9.4.7 Mutual Coupling and Interactions Between Elements 269 9.4.8 Transmitter Power Constraint 271 9.4.9 Impedance Matching at the Transmitter 271 9.5 Mutual Coupling and MIMO Receiving Arrays 273 9.5.1 Receive Array Signal and Noise Model 273 9.5.2 Receive Array Thévenin Equivalent Network 274 9.5.3 Loaded Receive Array Output Voltages 275 9.5.4 External Noise and Loss Noise 276 9.5.5 Signal Correlation Matrix 277 9.5.6 Signal Correlation in a Rich Multipath Environment 277 9.5.7 Mutual Coupling, Noise Matching, and Equivalent Receiver Noise 278 9.5.7.1 Active Impedances for Receiving Arrays 279 9.5.7.2 Equivalent Receiver Noise Temperature and Active Impedance Matching 280 9.5.7.3 Noise Matching Efficiency 281 9.6 Conclusion 282 References 283 10 Mutual Coupling in Beamforming and Interferometric Antennas 287 Hoi Shun Antony Lui and Trevor S. Bird 10.1 Introduction 287 10.2 The Array Manifold 288 10.3 Direction-of-Arrival Algorithms 288 10.3.1 Matrix Pencil Method for Direction of Arrival Estimation 290 10.4 Maximum Gain Design for Single and Multiple Beams 292 10.4.1 Penalty Function Optimization of Array Parameters 296 10.4.2 Method of Successive Projections 298 10.4.3 Comparison of Penalty Functions and Successive Projections 299 10.5 Direction-of-Arrival Estimation 302 10.5.1 No Coupling Situation 303 10.5.1.1 Cramer-Rao Lower Bound 303 10.5.1.2 Four-Element Linear Arrays with Different Apertures (Two Incoming Signals) 304 10.5.1.3 Fixed Aperture Uniform Linear Arrays with Different Numbers of Elements (Two Incoming Signals) 306 10.5.1.4 Fixed Aperture Uniform Linear Arrays with Different Number of Elements (Three Incoming Signals) 308 10.5.2 Perturbation Due to Mutual Coupling 308 10.5.2.1 Eight-Element Linear Arrays with Different Apertures (Three Incoming Signals) 310 10.5.2.2 Fixed Array Aperture with Different Numbers of Elements (Two Incoming Signals) 316 10.6 Conclusion 319 References 320 11 Techniques for Minimizing Mutual Coupling Effects in Arrays 325 Hoi Shun Antony Lui and Trevor S. Bird 11.1 Introduction 325 11.2 Mutual Coupling in Transmitting and Receiving Arrays 326 11.2.1 The Mutual Coupling Path 326 11.2.2 Moment Method Analysis 327 11.3 Typical Methods for Minimizing Mutual Coupling 330 11.3.1 Aperture Field Taper 331 11.3.2 Electromagnetic Fences 331 11.3.3 Other Approaches to Compensation 331 11.4 Techniques for Practical Mutual Coupling Compensation 332 11.4.1 Conventional Mutual Impedance Method 332 11.4.2 Full-Wave Method 335 11.4.3 Receiving-Mutual-Impedance Method 337 11.4.3.1 Determination of the Receiving Mutual Impedance 340 11.4.3.2 Comparison Between Different Mutual Impedances and Direction-Finding Applications 343 11.4.4 Calibration Method 347 11.4.5 Compensation Through Beamforming Network 348 11.4.6 Compensation in the Aperture 349 11.5 Concluding Remarks 354 References 355 12 Noise Performance in the Presence of Mutual Coupling 357 Christophe Craeye, Jean Cavillot and Eloy de Lera Acedo 12.1 Generalities About Noise in Receiving Arrays 357 12.2 Coupling of Noise Originating from LNAs 359 12.3 Coupling of Noise Originating from Lossy Antenna Arrays 362 12.4 Coupling of Noise Originating from the Far-Field Environment 363 12.5 Conclusion 366 References 367 13 Methods for Analyzing Mutual Coupling in Large Arrays 369 Christophe Craeye and Ha Bui Van 13.1 Goals of Numerical Mutual Coupling Analysis 369 13.2 Periodic Method of Moments 372 13.3 Iterative Solution Techniques 374 13.4 Macro Basis Functions 376 13.5 Pattern Transformations 380 13.6 Optimization 382 13.7 Conclusion 383 References 384 14 Measurement of Mutual Coupling Effects 389 Alpha O. Bah and Trevor S. Bird 14.1 Introduction 389 14.2 Instrumentation 389 14.3 Basic Measurement of Static Element Coupling and Radiation 391 14.3.1 Measurement of Coupling Coefficients 391 14.3.1.1 Input Reflection Coefficient and Insertion Loss 392 14.3.1.2 Mutual Coupling Coefficients 393 14.3.2 Measurement of Element Radiation 393 14.4 Measurement of Active Element Coupling and Array Radiation 398 14.4.1 Measurement of Active Element Patterns 398 14.4.2 Measurement of Array Radiation Patterns 399 14.4.2.1 Pattern Multiplication Method 400 14.4.2.2 The Unit Excitation Active Element Pattern Method 402 14.4.2.3 The Average Active Element Pattern Method 402 14.4.2.4 The Hybrid Active Element Pattern Method 403 14.4.3 Measurement of Input Mismatch and Coupling 403 14.4.3.1 Mutual Coupling Coefficient Method 404 14.4.3.2 Directional Coupler Method 405 14.4.3.3 Power Divider Method 406 14.4.4 Measurement of Gain 407 14.5 Conclusion 409 References 410 Appendix A Useful Identities 413 Trevor S. Bird A. 1 Vector Identities 413 A. 2 Geometric Identities 414 A. 3 Transverse Representation of the Electromagnetic Field 415 A. 4 Useful Functions 415 A. 5 Complex Fresnel Integrals 416 A. 6 Hypergeometric Function 417 References 417 Appendix B Bessel and Hankel Functions 419 Trevor S. Bird B.1 Properties 419 B.2 Series Involving Bessel Functions 422 B.3 Integrals of Bessel Functions 422 B.4 Lommel-Type Integrals 424 References 424 Appendix C Properties of Hankel Transform Functions 425 Trevor S. Bird References 426 Appendix D Properties of Surface Fock Functions 429 Trevor S. Bird D. 1 Definitions 429 D. 2 Soft Surface Functions (m > 0) 429 D. 3 Hard Surface Fock Functions (m < 0) 431 D. 4 Hard Surface Fock Function of the First Kind 432 References 432 Appendix E Four Parameter Noise Representation of an Amplifier 433 Christophe Craeye, Jean Cavillot and Eloy de Lera Acedo Reference 434 Appendix F Equivalent Noise Currents 435 Christophe Craeye, Jean Cavillot and Eloy de Lera Acedo Reference 436 Appendix G Basic Reciprocity Result 437 Christophe Craeye, Jean Cavillot and Eloy de Lera Acedo Appendix H On the Extended Admittance Matrix 439 Christophe Craeye and Ha Bui Van Index 441

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearn about the latest in cognitive and autonomous network management Towards Cognitive Autonomous Networks: Network Management Automation for 5G and Beyond delivers a comprehensive understanding of the current state-of-the-art in cognitive and autonomous network operation. Authors Mwanje and Bell fully describe today?s capabilities while explaining the future potential of these powerful technologies. This book advocates for autonomy in new 5G networks, arguing that the virtualization of network functions render autonomy an absolute necessity. Following that, the authors move on to comprehensively explain the background and history of large networks, and how we come to find ourselves in the place we?re in now. Towards Cognitive Autonomous Networks describes several novel techniques and applications of cognition and autonomy required for end-to-end cognition including: ? Configuration of autonomous networks ? Operation of autonomous networks ? Optimization of autonomous networks ? SelfTable of ContentsList of Contributors xix Foreword I xxi Foreword II xxv Preface xxvii 1 The Need for Cognitive Autonomy in Communication Networks 1Stephen S. Mwanje, Christian Mannweiler and Henning Sanneck 1.1 Complexity in Communication Networks 2 1.1.1 The Network as a Graph 2 1.1.2 Planes, Layers, and Cross-Functional Design 4 1.1.3 New Network Technology – 5G 6 1.1.4 Processes, Algorithms, and Automation 9 1.1.5 Network State Changes and Transitions 9 1.1.6 Multi-RAT Deployments 10 1.2 Cognition in Network Management Automation 11 1.2.1 Business, Service and Network Management Systems 11 1.2.2 The FCAPS Framework 13 1.2.3 Classes/Areas of NMA Use Cases 15 1.2.4 SON – The First Generation of NMA in Mobile Networks 17 1.2.5 Cognitive Network Management – Second Generation NMA 18 1.2.6 The Promise of Cognitive Autonomy 18 1.3 Taxonomy for Cognitive Autonomous Networks 19 1.3.1 Automation, Autonomy, Self-Organization, and Cognition 19 1.3.2 Data Analytics, Machine Learning, and AI 21 1.3.3 Network Autonomous Capabilities 22 1.3.4 Levels of Network Automation 23 1.3.5 Content Outline 25 References 27 2 Evolution of Mobile Communication Networks 29Christian Mannweiler, Cinzia Sartori, Bernhard Wegmann, Hannu Flinck, Andreas Maeder, Jürgen Goerge and Rudolf Winkelmann 2.1 Voice and Low-Volume Data Communications 30 2.1.1 Service Evolution – From Voice to Mobile Internet 31 2.1.2 2G and 3G System Architecture 33 2.1.3 GERAN – 2G RAN 35 2.1.4 UTRAN – 3G RAN 36 2.2 Mobile Broadband Communications 38 2.2.1 Mobile Broadband Services and System Requirements 38 2.2.2 4G System Architecture 39 2.2.3 E-UTRAN – 4G RAN 40 2.3 Network Evolution – Towards Cloud-Native Networks 42 2.3.1 System-Level Technology Enablers 42 2.3.2 Challenges and Constraints Towards Cloud-Native Networks 46 2.3.3 Implementation Aspects of Cloud-Native Networks 47 2.4 Multi-Service Mobile Communications 49 2.4.1 Multi-Tenant Networks for Vertical Industries 50 2.4.2 5G System Architecture 51 2.4.3 Service-Based Architecture in the 5G Core 54 2.4.4 5G RAN 56 2.4.5 5G New Radio 59 2.4.6 5G Mobile Network Deployment Options 63 2.5 Evolution of Transport Networks 69 2.5.1 Architecture of Transport Networks 69 2.5.2 Transport Network Technologies 70 2.6 Management of Communication Networks 72 2.6.1 Basic Principles of Network Management 72 2.6.2 Network Management Architectures 76 2.6.3 The Role of Information Models in Network Management 79 2.6.4 Dimensions of Describing Interfaces 80 2.6.5 Network Information Models 82 2.6.6 Limitations of Common Information Models 85 2.7 Conclusion – Cognitive Autonomy in 5G and Beyond 87 2.7.1 Management of Individual 5G Network Features 87 2.7.2 End-to-End Operation of 5G Networks 88 2.7.3 Novel Operational Stakeholders in 5G System Operations 88 References 89 3 Self-Organization in Pre-5G Communication Networks 93Muhammad Naseer-ul-Islam, Janne Ali-Tolppa, Stephen S. Mwanje and Guillaume Decarreau 3.1 Automating Network Operations 94 3.1.1 Traditional Network Operations 94 3.1.2 SON-Based Network Operations 95 3.1.3 SON Automation Areas and Use Cases 97 3.2 Network Deployment and Self-Configuration 98 3.2.1 Plug and Play 98 3.2.2 Automatic Neighbour Relations (ANR) 101 3.2.3 LTE Physical Cell Identity (PCI) Assignment 103 3.3 Self-Optimization 108 3.3.1 Mobility Load Balancing (MLB) 108 3.3.2 Mobility Robustness Optimization (MRO) 111 3.3.3 Energy Saving Management 115 3.3.4 Coverage and Capacity Optimization (CCO) 117 3.3.5 Random Access Channel (RACH) Optimization 120 3.3.6 Inter-Cell Interference Coordination (ICIC) 122 3.4 Self-Healing 124 3.4.1 The General Self-Healing Process 125 3.4.2 Cell Degradation Detection 125 3.4.3 Cell Degradation Diagnosis 127 3.4.4 Cell Outage Compensation 128 3.5 Support Function for SON Operation 129 3.5.1 SON Coordination 129 3.5.2 Minimization of Drive Test (MDT) 133 3.6 5G SON Support and Trends in 3GPP 136 3.6.1 Critical 5G RAN Features 136 3.6.2 SON Standardization for 5G 137 3.7 Concluding Remarks 140 References 141 4 Modelling Cognitive Decision Making 145Stephen S. Mwanje and Henning Sanneck 4.1 Inspirations from Bio-Inspired Autonomy 146 4.1.1 Distributed, Efficient Equilibria 146 4.1.2 Distributed, Effective Management 147 4.1.3 Robustness Amidst Self-Organization 147 4.1.4 Adaptability 147 4.1.5 Natural Stochasticity 148 4.1.6 From Simplicity Emerges Complexity 148 4.2 Self-Organization as Visible Cognitive Automation 148 4.2.1 Attempts at Definition 149 4.2.2 Bio-Chemical Examples of Self-Organizing Systems 149 4.2.3 Human Social-Economic Examples of Self-Organizing Systems 151 4.2.4 Features of Self-Organization – As Evidenced by Ant Foraging 152 4.2.5 Self-Organization or Cognitive Autonomy? – The Case of Ants 154 4.3 Human Cognition 154 4.3.1 Basic Cognitive Processes 155 4.3.2 Higher, Complex Cognitive Processes 156 4.3.3 Cognitive Processes in Learning 158 4.4 Modelling Cognition: A Perception-Reasoning Pipeline 159 4.4.1 Conceptualization 160 4.4.2 Contextualization 160 4.4.3 Organization 161 4.4.4 Inference 161 4.4.5 Memory Operations 162 4.4.6 Concurrent Processing and Actioning 162 4.4.7 Attention and the Higher Processes 163 4.4.8 Comparing Models of Cognition 164 4.5 Implications for Network Management Automation 167 4.5.1 Complexity of the PRP Processes 167 4.5.2 How Cognitive Is SON? 168 4.5.3 Expectations from Cognitive Autonomous Networks 168 4.6 Conclusions 169 References 170 5 Classic Artificial Intelligence: Tools for Autonomous Reasoning 173Stephen Mwanje, Marton Kajo, Benedek Schultz, Kimmo Hatonen and Ilaria Malanchini 5.1 Classical AI: Expectations and Limitations 174 5.1.1 Caveat: The Common-Sense Knowledge Problem 174 5.1.2 Search and Planning for Intelligent Decision Making 175 5.1.3 The Symbolic AI Framework 176 5.2 Expert Systems 177 5.2.1 System Components 177 5.2.2 Cognitive Capabilities and Application of Expert Systems 177 5.2.3 Rule-Based Handover-Events Root Cause Analysis 178 5.2.4 Limitations of Expert Systems 179 5.3 Closed-Loop Control Systems 180 5.3.1 The Controller 180 5.3.2 Cognitive Capabilities and Application of Closed-Loop Control 181 5.3.3 Example: Handover Optimization Loop 181 5.4 Case-Based Reasoning 182 5.4.1 The CBR Execution Cycle 183 5.4.2 Cognitive Capabilities and Applications of CBR Systems 184 5.4.3 CBR Example for RAN Energy Savings Management 185 5.4.4 Limitations of CBR Systems 185 5.5 Fuzzy Inference Systems 186 5.5.1 Fuzzy Sets and Membership Functions 186 5.5.2 Fuzzy Logic and Fuzzy Rules 187 5.5.3 Fuzzy Interference System Components 188 5.5.4 Cognitive Capabilities and Applications of FIS 189 5.5.5 Example Application: Selecting Handover Margins 190 5.6 Bayesian Networks 192 5.6.1 Definitions 193 5.6.2 Example Application: Diagnosis in Mobile Networks 193 5.6.3 Selecting and Training Bayesian Networks 194 5.6.4 Cognitive Capabilities and Applications of Bayesian Networks 195 5.7 Time Series Forecasting 196 5.7.1 Time Series Modelling 196 5.7.2 Auto Regressive and Moving Average Models 198 5.7.3 Cognitive Capabilities and Applications of Time Series Models 198 5.8 Conclusion 199 References 199 6 Machine Learning: Tools for End-to-End Cognition 203Stephen Mwanje, Marton Kajoa and Benedek Schultz 6.1 Learning from Data 204 6.1.1 Definitions 205 6.1.2 Training Using Numerical Optimization 207 6.1.3 Over- and Underfitting, Regularization 209 6.1.4 Supervised Learning in Practice – Regression 211 6.1.5 Supervised Learning in Practice – Classification 212 6.1.6 Unsupervised Learning in Practice – Dimensionality Reduction 213 6.1.7 Unsupervised Learning in Practice – Clustering Using K-Means 215 6.1.8 Cognitive Capabilities and Limitations of Machine Learning 216 6.1.9 Example Application: Temporal-Spatial Load Profiling 218 6.2 Neural Networks 219 6.2.1 Neurons and Activation Functions 220 6.2.2 Neural Network Computational Model 221 6.2.3 Training Through Gradient Descent and Backpropagation 222 6.2.4 Overfitting and Regularization 224 6.2.5 Cognitive Capabilities of Neural Networks 226 6.2.6 Application Areas in Communication Networks 226 6.3 A Dip into Deep Neural Networks 227 6.3.1 Deep Learning 227 6.3.2 The Vanishing Gradients Problem 228 6.3.3 Drivers, Enablers, and Computational Constraints 229 6.3.4 Convolutional Networks for Image Recognition 231 6.3.5 Recurrent Neural Networks for Sequence Processing 235 6.3.6 Combining LSTMs with Convolutional Networks 237 6.3.7 Autoencoders for Data Compression and Cleaning 238 6.3.8 Cognitive Capabilities and Application of Deep Neural Networks 240 6.4 Reinforcement Learning 241 6.4.1 Learning Through Exploration 241 6.4.2 RL Challenges and Framework 242 6.4.3 Value Functions 243 6.4.4 Model-Based Learning Through Value and Policy Iteration 244 6.4.5 Q-Learning Through Dynamic Programming 245 6.4.6 Linear Function Approximation 246 6.4.7 Generalized Approximators and Deep Q-Learning 247 6.4.8 Policy Gradient and Actor-Critic Methods 248 6.4.9 Cognitive Capabilities and Application of Reinforcement Learning 252 6.5 Conclusions 253 References 253 7 Cognitive Autonomy for Network Configuration 255Stephen S. Mwanje, Rashid Mijumbi and Lars Christoph Schmelz 7.1 Context Awareness for Auto-Configuration 256 7.1.1 Environment, Network, and Function Contexts 257 7.1.2 NAF Context-Aware Configuration 259 7.1.3 Objective Model 260 7.1.4 Context Model – Context Regions and Classes 263 7.1.5 Deriving the Context Model 265 7.1.6 Deriving Network and Function Configuration Policies 266 7.2 Multi-Layer Co-Channel PCI Auto-Configuration 267 7.2.1 Automating PCI Assignment in LTE and 5G Radio 268 7.2.2 PCI Assignment Objectives 269 7.2.3 Blind PCI Auto Configuration 270 7.2.4 Initial Blind Assignment 271 7.2.5 Learning Pico-Macro NRs 272 7.2.6 Predicting Macro-Macro NRs 272 7.2.7 PCI Update/Optimization and New Cells Configuration 273 7.2.8 Performance Expectations 273 7.3 Energy Saving Management in Multi-Layer RANs 274 7.3.1 The HetNet Energy Saving Management Challenge 275 7.3.2 Power Saving Groups 276 7.3.3 Cell Switch-On Switch-Off Order 277 7.3.4 PSG Load and ESM Triggering 278 7.3.5 Static Cell Activation and Deactivation Sequence 279 7.3.6 Reference-Cell-Based ESM 280 7.3.7 ESM with Multiple Reference Cells 281 7.3.8 Distributed Cell Activation and Deactivation 283 7.3.9 Improving ESM Solutions Through Cognition 285 7.4 Dynamic Baselines for Real-Time Network Control 285 7.4.1 DARN System Design 286 7.4.2 Data Pre-Processing 288 7.4.3 Prediction 288 7.4.4 Decomposition 289 7.4.5 Learning Augmentation 290 7.4.5.1 Knowledge Base 291 7.4.5.2 Alarm Generation 292 7.4.5.3 Metric Clustering 293 7.4.6 Evaluation 294 7.5 Conclusions 297 References 298 8 Cognitive Autonomy for Network-Optimization 301Stephen S. Mwanje, Mohammad Naseer Ul-Islam and Qi Liao 8.1 Self-Optimization in Communication Networks 302 8.1.1 Characterization of Self-Optimization 302 8.1.2 Open- and Closed-Loop Self-Optimization 304 8.1.3 Reactive and Proactive Self-Optimization 305 8.1.4 Model-Based and Statistical Learning Self-Optimization 306 8.2 Q-Learning Framework for Self-Optimization 306 8.2.1 Self-Optimization as a Learning Loop 307 8.2.2 Homogeneous Multi-Agent Q-Learning 308 8.2.3 The Heterogeneous Multi-Agent Q-Learning SO Framework 309 8.2.4 Fuzzy Q-Learning 310 8.3 QL for Mobility Robustness Optimization 314 8.3.1 HO Performance and Parameters Sensitivity 314 8.3.2 Q-Learning Based MRO (QMRO) 315 8.3.3 Parameter Search Strategy 317 8.3.4 Optimization Algorithm 318 8.3.5 Evaluation 318 8.4 Fuzzy Q-Learning for Tilt Optimization 322 8.4.1 Fuzzy Q-Learning Controller (FQLC) Components 322 8.4.2 The FQLC Algorithm 324 8.4.3 Homogeneous Multi-Agent Learning Strategies 325 8.4.4 Coverage and Capacity Optimization 327 8.4.5 Self-Healing and eNB Deployment 327 8.5 Interference-Aware Flexible Resource Assignment in 5G 329 8.5.1 Muting in Wireless Networks 330 8.5.2 Notations, Definitions, and Preliminaries 331 8.5.3 System Model and Problem Formulation 332 8.5.4 Optimal Resource Allocation and Performance Limits 334 8.5.5 Successive Approximation of Fixed Point (SAFP) 335 8.5.6 Partial Resource Muting 335 8.5.7 Evaluation 337 8.6 Summary and Open Challenges 340 References 341 9 Cognitive Autonomy for Network Self-Healing 345Janne Ali-Tolppa, Marton Kajo, Borislava Gajic, Ilaria Malanchini, Benedek Schultz and Qi Liao 9.1 Resilience and Self-Healing 346 9.1.1 Resilience by Design 347 9.1.2 Holistic Self-Healing 348 9.2 Overview on Cognitive Self-Healing 349 9.2.1 The Basic Building Blocks of Self-Healing 350 9.2.2 Profiling and Anomaly Detection 351 9.2.3 Diagnosis 353 9.2.4 Remediation Action 354 9.2.5 Advanced Self-Healing Concepts 354 9.2.6 Feature Reduction and Context Selection for Anomaly Detection 356 9.3 Anomaly Detection in Radio Access Networks 358 9.3.1 Use Cases 359 9.3.2 An Overview of the RAN Anomaly Detection Process 360 9.3.3 Profiling the Normal Behaviour 361 9.3.4 The New Normal – Adapting to Changes 362 9.3.5 Anomaly-Level Calculation 364 9.3.6 Anomaly Event Detection 365 9.4 Diagnosis and Remediation in Radio Access Networks 366 9.4.1 Symptom Collection 367 9.4.2 Diagnosis 367 9.4.3 Augmented Diagnosis 369 9.4.4 Deploying Corrective Actions 371 9.5 Knowledge Sharing in Cognitive Self-Healing 371 9.5.1 Information Sharing in Mobile Networks 371 9.5.2 Transfer Learning and Self-Healing for Mobile Networks 373 9.5.3 Applying Transfer Learning to Self-Healing 374 9.5.4 Prognostic Cross-Domain Anomaly Detection and Diagnosis 374 9.5.5 Cognitive Slice Lifecycle Management 375 9.5.6 Diagnosis Knowledge Cloud 376 9.5.7 Diagnosis Cloud Components 377 9.5.8 Diagnosis Cloud Evaluation 378 9.6 The Future of Self-Healing in Cognitive Mobile Networks 379 9.6.1 Predictive and Preventive Self-Healing 379 9.6.2 Predicting the Black Swan – Ludic Fallacy and Self-Healing 380 References 382 10 Cognitive Autonomy in Cross-Domain Network Analytics 385Szabolcs Nováczki, Péter Szilágyi and Csaba Vulkán 10.1 System State Modelling for Cognitive Automation 386 10.1.1 Cognitive Context-Aware Assessment and Actioning 386 10.1.2 State Modelling and Abstraction 387 10.1.3 Deriving the System-State Model 389 10.1.4 Symptom Attribution and Interpretation 392 10.1.5 Remediation and Self-Monitoring of Actions 394 10.2 Real-Time User-Plane Analytics 396 10.2.1 Levels of User Behaviour and Traffic Patterns 396 10.2.2 Monitoring and Insight Collection 398 10.2.3 Sources of U-Plane Insight 400 10.2.4 Insight Analytics from Correlated Measurements 401 10.2.5 Insight Analytics from Packet Patterns 402 10.3 Real-Time Customer Experience Management 405 10.3.1 Intent Contextualization and QoE Policy Automation 406 10.3.2 QoE Descriptors and QoE Target Definition 408 10.3.3 QoE Enforcement 410 10.4 Mobile Backhaul Automation 411 10.4.1 The Opportunities of MBH Automation 412 10.4.2 Architecture of the Automated MBH Management 413 10.4.3 MBH Automation Use Cases 416 10.5 Summary 417 References 418 11 System Aspects for Cognitive Autonomous Networks 419Stephen S. Mwanje, Janne Ali-Tolppa and Ilaria Malanchini 11.1 The SON Network Management Automation System 420 11.1.1 SON Framework for Network Management Automation 420 11.1.2 SON as Closed-Loop Control 421 11.1.3 SON Operation – The Rule-Based Multi-Agent Control 422 11.2 NMA Systems as Multi-Agent Systems 423 11.2.1 Single-Agent System (SAS) Decomposition 423 11.2.2 Single Coordinator or Multi-Agent Team Learning 424 11.2.3 Team Modelling 425 11.2.4 Concurrent Games/Concurrent Learning 425 11.3 Post-Action Verification of Automation Functions Effects 426 11.3.1 Scope Generation 427 11.3.2 Performance Assessment 428 11.3.3 Degradation Detection, Scoring and Diagnosis 429 11.3.4 Deploying Corrective Actions – The Deployment Plan 431 11.3.5 Resolving False Verification Collisions 433 11.4 Optimistic Concurrency Control Using Verification 436 11.4.1 Optimistic Concurrency Control in Distributed Systems 436 11.4.2 Optimistic Concurrency Control in SON Coordination 437 11.4.3 Extending the Coordination Transaction with Verification 437 11.5 A Framework for Cognitive Automation in Networks 440 11.5.1 Leveraging CFs in the Functional Decomposition of CAN Systems 440 11.5.2 Network Objectives and Context 442 11.5.3 Decision Applications (DApps) 443 11.5.4 Coordination and Control 444 11.5.4.1 Configuration Management Engine (CME) 444 11.5.4.2 Coordination Engine (CE) 445 11.5.5 Interfacing Among Functions 446 11.6 Synchronized Cooperative Learning in CANs 446 11.6.1 The SCL Principle 448 11.6.2 Managing Concurrency: Spatial-Temporal Scheduling (STS) 449 11.6.3 Aggregating Peer Information 451 11.6.4 SCL for MRO-MLB Conflicts 452 11.7 Inter-Function Coopetition – A Game Theoretic Opportunity 456 11.7.1 A Distributed Intelligence Challenge 457 11.7.2 Game Theory and Bayesian Games 458 11.7.3 Learning in Bayesian Games 461 11.7.4 CF Coordination as Learning Over Bayesian Games 463 11.8 Summary and Open Challenges 464 11.8.1 System Supervision 464 11.8.2 The New Paradigm 465 11.8.3 Old Problems with New Faces? 466 References 466 12 Towards Actualizing Network Autonomy 469Stephen S. Mwanje, Jürgen Goerge, Janne Ali-Tolppa, Kimmo Hatonen, Harald Bender, Csaba Rotter, Ilaria Malanchini and Henning Sanneck 12.1 Cognitive Autonomous Networks – The Vision 470 12.1.1 Cognitive Techniques in Network Automation 471 12.1.2 Success Factors in Implementing CAN Projects 475 12.1.3 Implications on KPI Design and Event Logging 476 12.1.4 Network Function Centralization and Federation 477 12.1.5 CAN Outlook on Architecture and Technology Evolution 478 12.1.6 CAN Outlook on NM System Evolution 483 12.2 Modelling Networks: The System View 486 12.2.1 System Description of a Mobile Network 486 12.2.2 Describing Performance 488 12.2.3 Implications on Automation 489 12.2.4 Control Strategies 490 12.2.5 Two-Dimensional Continuum of Control 495 12.2.6 Levels of Policy Abstraction 497 12.2.7 Implications on Optimization 500 12.2.8 The Promise of Intent-Based Network Control 502 12.3 The Development – Operations Interface in CANs 506 12.3.1 The DevOps Paradigm 506 12.3.2 Requirements for Successful Adoption of DevOps 508 12.3.3 Benefits of DevOps for CAN 509 12.4 CAN as Data Intensive Network Operations 510 12.4.1 Network Data: A New Network Asset 510 12.4.2 From Network Management to Data Management 511 12.4.3 Managing Failure in CANs 512 References 514 Index 517

Read more less

Book SynopsisSoft-Switching Technology for Three-phase Power Electronics Converters Discover foundational and advanced topics in soft-switching technology, including ZVS three-phase conversion In Soft-Switching Technology for Three-phase Power Electronics Converters, an expert team of researchers delivers a comprehensive exploration of soft-switching three-phase converters for applications including renewable energy and distribution power systems, AC power sources, UPS, motor drives, battery chargers, and more. The authors begin with an introduction to the fundamentals of the technology, providing the basic knowledge necessary for readers to understand the following articles. The book goes on to discuss three-phase rectifiers and three-phase grid inverters. It offers prototypes and experiments of each type of technology. Finally, the authors describe the impact of silicon carbide devices on soft-switching three-phase converters, studying the improvement in efficiency aTable of ContentsPreface xiii Nomenclature xv Part 1 Fundamental of Soft-switching 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Requirement of Three-phase Power Conversions 3 1.1.1 Three-phase Converters 3 1.1.2 Switching Frequency vs. Conversion Efficiency and Power Density 5 1.1.3 Switching Frequency and Impact of Soft-switching Technology 9 1.2 Concept of Soft-switching Technique 10 1.2.1 Soft-switching Types 11 1.2.2 Soft-switching Technique for Three-phase Converters 13 1.3 Applications of Soft-switching to Three-phase Converters 14 1.3.1 Renewable Energy and Power Generation 14 1.3.2 Energy Storage Systems 17 1.3.3 Distributed FACTS Devices 19 1.3.4 Uninterruptible Power Supply 19 1.3.5 Motor Drives 21 1.3.6 Fast EV Chargers 21 1.3.7 Power Supply 22 1.4 The Topics of This Book 22 References 23 2 Basics of Soft-switching Three-phase Converters 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Switching Characteristics of Three-phase Converters 28 2.2.1 Control of Three-phase Converters 28 2.2.2 Switching Transient Process and Switching Loss 31 2.2.3 Diode Turn-off and Reverse Recovery 34 2.2.4 Stray Inductance on Switching Process 35 2.2.5 Snubber 38 2.3 Classification of Soft-switching Three-phase Converters 39 2.4 DC-side Resonance Converters 40 2.4.1 Resonant DC-link Converters 40 2.4.2 Active-clamped Resonant DC-link (ACRDCL) Converter 45 2.4.3 ZVS-SVM Active-clamping Three-phase Converter 46 2.4.3.1 Active-clamping DC–DC Converter 46 2.4.3.2 Active-clamping Three-phase Converter 52 2.5 AC-side Resonance Converters 54 2.5.1 Auxiliary Resonant Commutated Pole Converter 55 2.5.2 Coupled-inductor Zero Voltage-transition (ZVT) Inverter 59 2.5.3 Zero-current Transition (ZCT) Inverter 62 2.6 Soft-switching Inverter with TCM Control 62 2.7 Summary 66 References 67 3 Soft-switching PWM Control for Active Clamped Three-phase Converters 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 PWM of Three-phase Converters 72 3.3 Edge-aligned PWM 76 3.4 ZVS Active-clamping Converter with Edge-aligned PWM 77 3.4.1 Stage Analysis 78 3.4.2 ZVS Conditions 88 3.4.2.1 The First Resonant Stage 88 3.4.2.2 The Second Resonant Stage 91 3.4.2.3 Steady Conditions 93 3.4.3 Impact of PWM Scheme and Load on ZVS Condition 99 3.5 Control Diagram of the Converter with EA-PWM 105 3.6 ZVS-SVM 107 3.6.1 Vector Sequence 109 3.6.2 ZVS-SVM Scheme 111 3.6.3 Characteristics of the Converter with ZVS-SVM 113 3.7 Summary 115 References 116 Part 2 ZVS-SVM Applied to Three-phase Rectifiers 119 4 Three-phase Rectifier with Compound Active-clamping Circuit 121 4.1 Introduction 121 4.2 Operation Principle of CAC Rectifier 122 4.2.1 Space Vector of Three-phase Grid Voltage 122 4.2.2 Space Vector Modulation of Three-phase Converter 124 4.2.3 Switching Scheme of CAC Rectifier 126 4.3 Circuit Analysis 134 4.3.1 Operation Stage Analysis 134 4.3.2 Resonant Stages Analysis 138 4.3.3 Steady State Analysis 142 4.3.4 Soft-switching Condition 144 4.3.5 Control Technique of Compound Active-clamping Three-phase Rectifier 145 4.4 Prototype Design 147 4.4.1 Specifications of a 40 kW Rectifier 147 4.4.2 Parameter Design 147 4.4.3 Experiment Platform and Testing Results 151 4.5 Summary 156 References 156 5 Three-phase Rectifier with Minimum Voltage Active-clamping Circuit 159 5.1 Introduction 159 5.2 Operation Principle of MVAC Rectifier 159 5.2.1 Space Vector Modulation of Three-phase Converter 159 5.2.2 Switching Scheme of MVAC Rectifier 162 5.3 Circuit Analysis of MVAC Rectifier 168 5.3.1 Operation Stage Analysis 168 5.3.2 Resonant Stages Analysis 173 5.3.3 Steady State Analysis 177 5.3.4 Soft-switching Condition 179 5.3.5 Control Technique of Minimum Voltage Active-clamping Three-phase Rectifier 182 5.4 Prototype Design 184 5.4.1 Specifications of a 30 kW Rectifier 184 5.4.2 Parameter Design 184 5.4.3 Experiment Platform and Testing Results 187 5.5 Summary 191 References 192 Part 3 ZVS-SVM Applied to Three-phase Grid Inverters 193 6 Three-phase Grid Inverter with Minimum Voltage Active-clamping Circuit 195 6.1 Introduction 195 6.2 Operation Principle of MVAC Inverter 195 6.2.1 Space Vector of Three-phase Grid Voltage 195 6.2.2 Space Vector Modulation of Three-phase Inverter 197 6.2.3 Switching Scheme of MVAC Inverter Under Unit Power Factor 200 6.2.4 Generalized Space Vector Modulation Method of MVAC Inverter with Arbitrary Output 206 6.3 Circuit Analysis 210 6.3.1 Operation Stage Analysis 210 6.3.2 Resonant Stages Analysis 214 6.3.3 Steady-state Analysis 217 6.3.4 Soft-switching Condition 218 6.3.5 Control Technique of MVAC Inverter 219 6.4 Design Prototype 221 6.4.1 Specifications of a 30-kW Inverter 221 6.4.2 Parameter Design 222 6.4.3 Experiment Results 225 6.5 Summary 230 References 230 7 Three-phase Inverter with Compound Active-clamping Circuit 231 7.1 Introduction 231 7.2 Scheme of ZVS-SVM 232 7.2.1 Switch Commutations in Main Bridges of Three-phase Inverter 232 7.2.2 Derivation of ZVS-SVM 233 7.3 Circuit Analysis 238 7.3.1 Operation Stage Analysis 238 7.3.2 Resonant Stages Analysis 243 7.3.3 Steady-state Analysis 247 7.3.4 Soft-switching Condition 250 7.3.5 Resonant Time Comparison 250 7.4 Implementation of ZVS-SVM 252 7.4.1 Regulation of Short Circuit Stage 252 7.4.2 Implementation in Digital Controller 252 7.4.3 Control Block Diagram with ZVS-SVM 255 7.5 Prototype Design 256 7.5.1 Specifications of a 30-kW Inverter 256 7.5.2 Parameter Design 256 7.5.2.1 Requirement of Diode Reverse Recovery Suppression 256 7.5.2.2 Requirement of Voltage Stress 257 7.5.2.3 Requirement of Reducing Turn-off Loss in Auxiliary Switch 257 7.5.2.4 Requirement of Minimum Resonant Capacitance 258 7.5.2.5 Requirement of Resonant Time 258 7.5.3 Experiment Platform and Testing Results 259 7.6 Summary 263 References 263 8 Loss Analysis and Optimization of a Zero-voltage-switching Inverter 265 8.1 Introduction 265 8.2 Basic Operation Principle of the CAC ZVS Inverter 266 8.2.1 Operation Stage Analysis 266 8.2.2 ZVS Condition Derivation 272 8.3 Loss and Dimension Models 276 8.3.1 Loss Model of IGBT Devices 276 8.3.1.1 Conduction Loss of IGBT Devices 276 8.3.1.2 Switching Loss of the IGBT Devices 278 8.3.2 Loss and Dimension Models of Resonant Inductor 281 8.3.3 Loss and Dimension Models of the Filter Inductor 283 8.3.4 Dimension Model of Other Components 284 8.3.4.1 Clamping Capacitor 284 8.3.4.2 Heat Sink 285 8.4 Parameters Optimization and Design Methodology 288 8.4.1 Objective Function 288 8.4.2 Constrained Conditions 289 8.4.3 Optimization Design 290 8.5 Prototype and Experimental Results 292 8.6 Summary 295 References 296 9 Design of the Resonant Inductor 297 9.1 Introduction 297 9.2 Fundamental of Inductor 297 9.3 Design Methodology 299 9.3.1 Cross-section Area of the Core A c 300 9.3.2 Window Area A e 300 9.3.3 Area-product A p 300 9.3.4 Turns of Winding N 301 9.3.5 Length of the Air Gap l g 301 9.3.6 Winding Loss P dc 301 9.3.7 Core Loss P core 302 9.3.8 Design Procedure 303 9.4 Design Example 303 9.4.1 Barrel Winding Discussion 305 9.4.1.1 Winding Position Discussion 306 9.4.1.2 Winding Thickness Discussion 310 9.4.2 Flat Winding Discussion 311 9.4.2.1 Different Structures Comparison 311 9.4.2.2 Winding Position Discussion 314 9.5 Design Verification 317 9.5.1 Simulation Verification 317 9.5.2 Experimental Verification 318 9.6 Summary 320 References 320 Part 4 Impact of SiC Device on Soft-switching Grid Inverters 321 10 Soft-switching SiC Three-phase Grid Inverter 323 10.1 Introduction 323 10.2 Soft-switching Three-phase Inverter 324 10.2.1 SVM Scheme in Hard-switching Inverter 324 10.2.2 ZVS-SVM Scheme in Soft-switching Inverter 326 10.2.3 Operation Stages and ZVS Condition of Soft-switching Inverter 326 10.2.3.1 Operation Stages Analysis 326 10.2.3.2 ZVS Condition Derivation 329 10.3 Efficiency Comparison of Hard-switching SiC Inverter and Soft-switching SiC Inverter 334 10.3.1 Parameters Design of Soft-switching SiC Inverter 334 10.3.1.1 AC Filter Inductor 335 10.3.1.2 Resonant Parameters 335 10.3.1.3 dc Filter Capacitor 338 10.3.1.4 Clamping Capacitor 338 10.3.1.5 Cores Selection 341 10.3.1.6 Switching Loss Measurement 342 10.3.2 Comparison of Two SiC Inverters 344 10.3.2.1 Loss Distributions 345 10.3.2.2 Efficiency Stiffness 347 10.3.2.3 Passive Components Volumes 348 10.3.3 Experimental Verification 348 10.3.3.1 Efficiency Test 348 10.3.3.2 Passive Components Volumes Comparison 350 10.4 Design of Low Stray Inductance Layout in Soft-switching SiC Inverter 350 10.4.1 Oscillation Model 350 10.4.2 Design of Low Stray Inductance 7-in-1 SiC Power Module 353 10.4.3 7-in-1 SiC Power Module Prototype and Testing Results 356 10.4.3.1 Stray Inductance Measurement 356 10.4.3.2 Voltage Stress Comparison 358 10.5 Design of Low Loss Resonant Inductor in Soft-switching SiC Inverter 359 10.5.1 Impact of Distributed Air Gap 359 10.5.2 Optimal Flux Density Investigation 360 10.5.3 Optimal Winding Foil Thickness Investigation 360 10.5.4 Resonant Inductor Prototypes and Loss Measurement 364 10.6 Summary 368 References 368 11 Soft-switching SiC Single-phase Grid Inverter with Active Power Decoupling 371 11.1 Introduction 371 11.1.1 Modulation Methods for Single-phase Inverter 371 11.1.2 APD in Single-phase Grid Inverter 372 11.2 Operation Principle 376 11.2.1 Topology and Switching Scheme 376 11.2.2 Stage Analysis 379 11.3 Circuit Analysis 385 11.3.1 Resonant Stages Analysis 385 11.3.2 Steady-state Analysis 387 11.3.3 Soft-switching Condition 388 11.3.4 Short Circuit Current 388 11.4 Design Prototype 390 11.4.1 Rated Parameters of a 1.5-kW Inverter 390 11.4.2 Parameter Design 391 11.4.3 Experimental Platform and Testing Results 393 11.5 Summary 398 References 398 12 Soft-switching SiC Three-phase Four-wire Back-to-back Converter 401 12.1 Introduction 401 12.2 Operation Principle 402 12.2.1 Commutations Analysis 403 12.2.2 Operation Scheme 403 12.2.3 Stage Analysis 405 12.3 Circuit Analysis 414 12.3.1 Resonant Stage Analysis 414 12.3.2 Steady State Analysis 417 12.3.3 ZVS Condition 422 12.4 Design Prototype 423 12.4.1 Parameters Design 423 12.4.2 Loss Analysis 427 12.4.3 Experimental Results 431 12.5 Summary 440 References 440 Appendix 441 A.1 Basic of SVM 441 A.2 Switching Patterns of SVM 12 446 A.3 Switching Patterns of ZVS-SVM 448 A.4 Inverter Loss Models 450 A.4.1 Loss Model of Hard-switching Three-phase Grid Inverter 450 A.4.1.1 Conducting Loss 450 A.4.1.2 Switching Loss 453 A.4.1.3 AC Filter Inductor Loss and Volume Estimations 454 A.4.2 Loss Model of Soft-switching Three-phase Grid Inverter 456 A.4.2.1 Loss in Main Switches 456 A.4.2.2 Loss in Auxiliary Switch 458 A.4.2.3 Loss and Volume of Filter Inductor and Resonant Inductor 459 A.5 AC Filter Inductance Calculation 459 A.6 DC Filter Capacitance Calculation 462 Index 469

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn illuminatingexaminationof thebenefits and drawbacks ofglobal, digital communication In thisnewly revised Second Edition ofDigital Universe: The Global Telecommunication Revolution,journalism anddigitaltelecommunication expert Peter B. Seel deliversa fascinating and insightful exploration of digitalcommunicationtechnologies and their substantial effects on contemporary life.Thisbook traces the evolution of digital information and communication tools used around the world, from undersea telegraph cablesto the newest mobile phones. Digital Universeintroduces readers to important inventors, scientists, artists, and thinkers in its discussions of the history and socio-cultural effects of technologyadoption. It offers anaccessibletour of the global digital universe and provides new perspectivesand critical observationson mediated human communication. The book also includes: A thorough introductionto digital communication, the internet, anTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xi Key Terms and Abbreviations xiii Part I Introduction and Framing 1 1 Immersion in the Digital Universe 3 2 The Future of Moore’s Law in the Digital Universe 12 3 Critical Perspectives 22 Part II Internet and Web History 35 4 Origins of the Internet 37 5 Internet Evolution 54 6 The Web 68 Part III Global Telecommunication and Media Convergence 85 7 Telecommunication and the “Flat” World 87 8 Wired and Wireless Technologies 104 9 Digital Media Convergence 129 Part IV Internet Control, Cyberculture, and Dystopian Views 143 10 The Public and Private Internet 145 11 Censorship and Global Cyberculture 163 12 Privacy and Surveillance 179 Part V New Communication Technologies and the Future 201 13 Artificial Intelligence and Telecommunication 203 14 Alternative Digital Realties 224 15 The Future of the Digital Universe 245 Index 252

Read more less

Book SynopsisLearn how radio access network (RAN) slicing allows 5G networks to adapt to a wide range of environments in this masterful resource Radio Access Network Slicing and Virtualization for 5G Vertical Industriesprovides readers with a comprehensive and authoritative examination of crucial topics in the field of radio access network (RAN) slicing. Learn from renowned experts as they detail how this technology supports and applies to various industrial sectors, including manufacturing, entertainment, public safety, public transport, healthcare, financial services, automotive, and energy utilities. Radio Access Network Slicing and Virtualization for 5G Vertical Industries explains how future wireless communication systems must be built to handle high degrees of heterogeneity, including different types of applications, device classes, physical environments, mobility levels, and carrier frequencies. The authors describe how RAN slicing can be utilized to adapt 5G technologies to such wide-ranTable of ContentsAbout the Editors xiii Preface xvii List of Contributors xxiii List of Abbreviations xxvii Part I Waveforms and Mixed-Numerology 1 1 ICI Cancellation Techniques Based on Data Repetition for OFDM Systems 3Miaowen Wen, Jun Li, Xilin Cheng and Xiang Cheng 1.1 OFDM History 3 1.2 OFDM Principle 4 1.2.1 Subcarrier Orthogonality 4 1.2.2 Discrete Implementation 5 1.2.3 OFDM in Multipath Channel 6 1.3 Carrier Frequency Offset Effect 8 1.3.1 Properties of ICI Coefficients 9 1.3.2 Carrier-to-Interference Power Ratio 9 1.4 ICI Cancellation Techniques 11 1.4.1 One-Path Cancellation with Mirror Mapping 11 1.4.1.1 MSR Scheme 12 1.4.1.2 MCSR Scheme 13 1.4.2 Two-Path Cancellation with Mirror Mapping 14 1.4.2.1 MCVT Scheme 15 1.4.2.2 MCJT Scheme 15 1.4.3 CIR Comparison 16 1.5 Experiment on Sea 17 1.5.1 Experiment Settings 18 1.5.2 Experiment Results 21 1.6 Summary 22 References 23 2 Filtered OFDM: An Insight into Intrinsic In-Band Interference 25Juquan Mao, Lei Zhang and Pei Xiao 2.1 Introduction 25 2.1.1 Notations 26 2.2 System Model for f-OFDM SISO System 26 2.3 In-Band Interference Analysis and Discussion 30 2.3.1 Channel Diagonalization and In-Band Interference-Free Systems 30 2.3.2 In-Band Interference Power 31 2.3.3 In-Band Interference Mitigation: A Practical Approach for Choosing CR Length 32 2.3.4 An Alternative for In-Band Interference Mitigation: Frequency Domain Equalization (FDE) 33 2.3.4.1 Linear Equalizers 33 2.3.4.2 Nonlinear Equalizers 34 2.4 Numerical Results 34 2.4.1 Numerical Results for In-Band Interference 35 2.5 Conclusion 38 1.2 Appendix 38 1.2.1 Derivation of zk 38 2.3 Appendix 39 2.3.1 Proof of 𝚯preBeing a Strict Upper Triangle 39 3.4 Appendix 39 3.4.1 Proof of Property 2.A.2 39 References 40 3 Windowed OFDM for Mixed-Numerology 5G and Beyond Systems 43Bowen Yang, Xiaoying Zhang, Lei Zhang, Arman Farhang, Pei Xiao and Muhammad Ali Imran 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 W-OFDM System Model 45 3.2.1 Single Numerology System Model 46 3.2.2 System Model for Mixed Numerologies 48 3.3 Inter-numerology Interference Analysis 50 3.3.1 Inter-numerology Interference Analysis for Numerology 1 50 3.3.2 Inter-numerology Interference Analysis for Numerology 2 52 3.4 Numerical Results and Discussion 54 3.5 Conclusions 57 3.6 Derivation of (3.9) 57 3.7 Derivations of (3.28) 58 3.8 Derivations of (3.30) 59 References 59 4 Generalized Frequency Division Multiplexing: Unified Multicarrier Framework 63Ahmad Nimr, Zhongju Li, Marwa Chafii and Gerhard Fettweis 4.1 Overview of MulticarrierWaveforms 63 4.1.1 Time–Frequency Representation 64 4.1.1.1 Discrete-Time Representation 65 4.1.1.2 Relation to Gabor Theory 66 4.1.2 GFDM As a FlexibleWaveform 66 4.1.2.1 GFDM with Multiple Prototype Pulses 67 4.1.3 Generalized Block-Based Multicarrier 68 4.1.3.1 Transmitter 69 4.1.3.2 Receiver 69 4.2 GFDM As a Flexible Framework 70 4.2.1 GFDM Representations 71 4.2.1.1 Filter Bank Representation 71 4.2.1.2 Vector Representation 71 4.2.1.3 2D-Block Representation 72 4.2.1.4 GFDM Matrix Structure 73 4.2.2 Architecture and Extended Flexibility 74 4.2.2.1 Alternative Interpretation of GFDM 75 4.2.2.2 Extended Flexibility 76 4.2.2.3 Flexible Hardware Architecture 76 4.3 GFDM for OFDM Enhancement 78 4.3.1 Transmitter 78 4.3.2 Receiver 79 4.3.2.1 LMMSE GFDM-Based Receiver 79 4.4 Conclusions 80 References 80 5 Filter Bank Multicarrier Modulation 83Behrouz Farhang-Boroujeny 5.1 Introduction 83 5.1.1 Notations: 83 5.2 FBMC Methods 84 5.3 Theory 84 5.3.1 CMT 85 5.3.2 SMT 88 5.4 Prototype Filter Design 92 5.4.1 Prototype Filters for Time-Invariant Channels 92 5.4.2 Prototype Filters for Time-Varying Channels 93 5.5 Synchronization and Tracking Methods 94 5.5.1 Preamble Design 95 5.5.2 Channel Tracking 96 5.5.3 Timing Tracking 97 5.6 Equalization 97 5.7 Computational Complexity 98 5.8 Applications 98 References 99 6 Orthogonal Time–Frequency Space Modulation: Principles and Implementation 103Arman Farhang and Behrouz Farhang-Boroujeny 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 OTFS Principles 105 6.3 OFDM-Based OTFS 107 6.4 Channel Impact 108 6.5 Simplified Modem Structure 110 6.6 Complexity Analysis 113 6.7 Recent Results and Potential Research Directions 114 References 117 Part II RAN Slicing and 5G Vertical Industries 121 7 Multi-Numerology Waveform Parameter Assignment in 5G 123Ahmet Yazar and Hüseyin Arslan 7.1 Introduction 123 7.1.1 Problem Definitions 125 7.1.2 Literature Review 126 7.2 Waveform Parameter Options 128 7.3 Waveform Parameter Assignment 130 7.4 Conclusion 132 References 132 8 Network Slicing with Spectrum Sharing 137Yue Liu, Xu Yang and Laurie Cuthbert 8.1 The Need for Spectrum Sharing 137 8.2 Historical Approaches to Spectrum Sharing 139 8.2.1 Classifications of Spectrum Sharing 140 8.2.1.1 Orthogonality 140 8.2.1.2 Sharing Rights 141 8.2.1.3 Allocation of Resources 142 8.3 Network Slicing in the RAN 144 8.4 Radio Resource Allocation that Considers Spectrum Sharing 146 8.4.1 Example Radio Resource Allocation for Sharing Through Network Slicing 147 8.4.2 Other Considerations 153 8.5 Isolation 156 8.5.1 Example Isolation Results Using CAC 157 8.5.1.1 Type A: Baseline – CACWithout Network Isolation and Without Protection for Existing Users 158 8.5.1.2 Type B: Optimum Types – B1 and B2 158 8.5.1.3 Type C: Without Compensation – C1 and C2 159 8.6 Conclusions 162 Acknowledgments 163 References 163 9 Access Control and Handoff Policy Design for RAN Slicing 167Yao Sun, Lei Zhang, Gang Feng and Muhammad Ali Imran 9.1 A Framework of User Access Control for RAN Slicing 167 9.1.1 System Model for RAN Slicing 168 9.1.2 UE Association Problem Description 170 9.1.3 Admission Control Mechanisms Design for RAN Slicing 170 9.1.3.1 Optimal QoS AC Mechanism 171 9.1.3.2 Num-AC Mechanism 176 9.1.4 Experiments, Results, and Discussions 177 9.2 Smart Handoff Policy Design for RAN Slicing 179 9.2.1 RAN Slice Based Mobile Network Model 179 9.2.2 Multi-Agent Reinforcement Learning Based Handoff Framework 181 9.2.3 LESS Algorithm for Target BS and NS Selection 181 9.2.3.1 q-Value Update Policy 182 9.2.3.2 Optimal Action Policy 183 9.2.4 Experiment, Results, and Discussions 184 9.3 Summary 186 References 186 10 Robust RAN Slicing 189Ruihan Wen and Gang Feng 10.1 Introduction 189 10.2 Network Model 190 10.2.1 Slice Failure Detection Process 190 10.2.2 System Model 191 10.3 Robust RAN Slicing 193 10.3.1 Failure Recovery Problem Formulation 193 10.3.2 Robust RAN Slicing Problem Formulation 195 10.3.3 Variable Neighborhood Search Based Heuristic for Robust RAN Slicing 196 10.4 Numerical Results 199 10.4.1 Performance Metrics 199 10.4.2 Simulation Scenarios and Settings 200 10.4.3 Results 201 10.5 Conclusions and Future Work 206 References 206 11 Flexible Function Split Over Ethernet Enabling RAN Slicing 209Ghizlane Mountaser and Toktam Mahmoodi 11.1 Flexible Functional Split Toward RAN Slicing 209 11.1.1 Full Centralization and CPRI 209 11.1.2 RAN Functional Split 210 11.1.3 Flexible Functional Split as RAN Slicing Enabler 213 11.2 Fronthaul Reliability and Slicing by Deploying Multipath at the Fronthaul 213 11.2.1 Packet-Based Fronthaul 213 11.2.2 Multipath Packet-Based Fronthaul for Enhancing Reliability 213 11.2.3 Slicing Within Multipath Fronthaul 214 11.3 Experimentation Results Evaluation of Flexible Functional Split for RAN Slicing 214 11.3.1 Experimental Setup 214 11.3.2 Evaluation and Discussion of the Results 215 11.4 Simulation Results Analysis of Multipath Packet-Based Fronthaul for RAN Slicing 217 11.4.1 Simulation System Model 217 References 219 12 Service-Oriented RAN Support of Network Slicing 221Wei Tan, Feng Han, Yinghao Jin and Chenchen Yang 12.1 Introduction 221 12.2 General Concept and Principles 222 12.2.1 Network Slicing Concepts 223 12.2.2 Overall RAN Subsystem 224 12.2.3 Key Principles of Network Slicing in RAN 225 12.3 RAN Subsystem Deployment Scenarios 227 12.4 Key Technologies to Enable Service-Oriented RAN Slicing 229 12.4.1 Device Awareness of RAN Part of Network Slice 230 12.4.2 Slice-Specific RAN Part of Network Slice 232 12.4.3 Mission-Driven Resource Utilization, Sharing, and Aggregation 234 12.4.4 Slice-Aware Connected UE Mobility 235 12.4.5 Slice-Level Handlings for Idle/Inactive UEs 237 12.5 Summary 237 References 238 13 5G Network Slicing for V2X Communications: Technologies and Enablers 239Claudia Campolo, Antonella Molinaro and Vincenzo Sciancalepore 13.1 Introduction 239 13.2 Vehicular Applications 240 13.3 V2X Communication Technologies 241 13.3.1 The C-V2X Technology 242 13.3.1.1 The PC5 Radio Interface 242 13.3.1.2 The LTE-Uu Interface 242 13.3.1.3 Core Network 243 13.3.2 C-V2X Toward 5G 243 13.3.2.1 Radio Interface 243 13.3.2.2 Core Network 244 13.4 Cloudification in V2X Environments 245 13.4.1 The Role of MEC 245 13.4.2 ETSI MEC-Based Programmable Interfaces 246 13.4.3 MEC-Based Support for V2X Applications 247 13.5 Transport and Tunneling Protocol for V2X 248 13.5.1 GTP-U Encapsulation 248 13.5.2 Segment Routing v6 248 13.5.3 Scalability and Flexibility in SRv6 250 13.6 Network Slicing for V2X 251 13.6.1 3GPP Specifications 251 13.6.2 Literature Overview 252 13.7 Lessons Learnt and Guidelines 255 13.7.1 Slice Mapping and Identification 255 13.7.2 Multi-tenancy Management 255 13.7.3 Massive Communications 255 13.7.4 Transparent Mobility 256 13.7.5 Isolation 256 13.8 Conclusions 256 References 256 14 Optimizing Resource Allocation in URLLC for Real-Time Wireless Control Systems 259Bo Chang, Liying Li and Guodong Zhao 14.1 Introduction 259 14.2 System Model with Latency and Reliability Constraints 261 14.2.1 Wireless Control Model 262 14.2.2 Wireless Communication Model 266 14.3 Communication-Control Co-Design 267 14.3.1 Communication Constraint 267 14.3.2 Control Constraint 268 14.3.3 Problem Formulation 269 14.4 Optimal Resource Allocation for The Proposed Co-Design 270 14.4.1 Relationship Between Control and Communication 270 14.4.2 Optimal Resource Allocation 271 14.4.2.1 Problem Conversion 271 14.4.2.2 Problem Solution 272 14.4.3 Optimal Control Convergence Rate 273 14.5 Simulations Results 273 14.5.1 Control Performance 274 14.5.2 Communication Performance 276 14.6 Conclusions 279 References 279 Index 283

Read more less

Book SynopsisADVANCES IN REMOTE SENSING TECHNOLOGY AND THE THREE POLES Covers recent advances in remote sensing technology applied to the Three Poles, a concept encompassing the Arctic, Antarctica, and the Himalayas Advances in Remote Sensing Technology and the Three Poles is a multidisciplinary approach studying the lithosphere, hydrosphere (encompassing both limnosphere, and oceanosphere), atmosphere, biosphere, and anthroposphere, of the Arctic, the Antarctic and the Himalayas. The drastic effects of climate change on polar environments bring to the fore the often subtle links between climate change and processes in the hydrosphere, biosphere, and lithosphere, while unanswered questions of the polar regions will help plan and formulate future research projects. Sample topics covered in the work include: Terrestrial net primary production of the Arctic and modeling of Arctic landform evolutionGlaciers and glacial environments, including a geological, geophysical, and geospatial survey of Himalayan glaciersSea ice dynamics in the Antarctic region under a changing climate, the Quaternary geology and geomorphology of AntarcticaContinuous satellite missions, data availability, and the nature of future satellite missions, including scientific data sharing policies in different countriesSoftware, tools, models, and remote sensing technology for investigating polar and other environments For postgraduates and researchers working in remote sensing, photogrammetry, and landscape evolution modeling, Advances in Remote Sensing Technology and the Three Poles is a crucial resource for understanding current technological capabilities in the field along with the latest scientific research that has been conducted in polar areas.Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xvii Notes on Contributors xx Foreword xxv Preface xxvi List of Acronyms xxviii Section I Earth Observation (EO) and Remote Sensing (RS) Applications in Polar Studies 1 1 The Three Poles: Advances in Remote Sensing in Relation to Spheres of the Planet Earth 3 Manish Pandey, Prem C. Pandey, Yogesh Ray, Aman Arora, Shridhar Digmabar Jawak, and Uma Kant Shukla 1.1 Introduction 3 1.1.1 Earth as a System and Components of the Earth System 4 1.1.2 Role of the “Three Poles” and the Three Poles Regions in the Earth System 4 1.1.2.1 Defining the Three Poles, Three Poles Regions, and Their Geographical Extent 4 1.1.2.2 Interaction Among Components of the Earth System and Role of the Three Poles 5 1.1.3 Advancement of RS Technologies in Relation to Their Application in the Three Poles Regions 6 1.1.3.1 Remote Sensing Technology Advancements 6 1.1.3.2 Role of Remote Sensing (RS) in Mapping/Monitoring/Quantitative Analysis of Sub-Systems of Our Planet in the Three Poles Regions 7 1.2 Aim of the Book and Its Five Sections 11 1.3 Overview of the Contributing Chapters Covering Research About Different Aspects of the Sub-Systems of Our Planet in the Three Poles Regions 11 1.4 Summary and Recommendations 14 References 15 2 Continuous Satellite Missions, Data Availability, and Nature of Future Satellite Missions with Implications to Polar Regions 24 Jagriti Mishra, Takuya Inoue, and Avinash Kumar Pandey 2.1 Introduction 24 2.1.1 Types of Orbit 24 2.1.1.1 High Earth Orbit (HEO) 25 2.1.1.2 Medium Earth Orbit (MEO) 25 2.1.1.3 Semi-Synchronous Orbit 25 2.1.1.4 Molniya Orbit 25 2.1.1.5 Low Earth Orbit (LEO) 25 2.1.1.6 Polar Orbit and Sun-Synchronous Orbit 25 2.1.1.7 Lagrange’s Point 26 2.2 Satellite Missions and Data Availability 26 2.3 Future Satellite Missions 26 2.4 Applicability of Satellite Products in Three Poles Regions 32 2.5 Challenges and Limitations 33 2.6 Summary 34 Acknowledgments 34 References 34 3 Assessing the Accuracy of Digital Elevation Models for Darjeeling-Sikkim Himalayas 36 Prodip Mandal and Shraban Sarkar 3.1 Introduction 36 3.2 Study Area 37 3.3 Materials and Methods 38 3.3.1 Generation of Cartosat-1 DEM and Orthoimage 38 3.3.2 TanDEM-X 40 3.3.3 Alos Palsar 40 3.3.4 DGPS Survey for Obtaining Ground Control Points (GCPs) 40 3.3.5 Datum Transformation 40 3.3.6 Accuracy Assessment Methods 40 3.3.6.1 Vertical Accuracy 41 3.3.6.2 Spatial Accuracy 41 3.4 Results and Discussion 41 3.4.1 Vertical Accuracy Assessment: Comparison of DEMs With Reference to GCPs 41 3.4.2 Vertical Accuracy of DEMs for Different Land Use Classes 41 3.4.2.1 Dense Forest 41 3.4.2.2 Open Forest 43 3.4.2.3 Tea Garden 43 3.4.2.4 Built-up Area 43 3.4.3 Spatial Accuracy Assessment: Comparison of DEMs With Reference to Stream Networks 43 3.5 Conclusions 45 Acknowledgments 46 References 46 4 An Overview of Morphometry Software Packages, Tools, and Add-ons 49 Satarupa Mitra, Shailendra Pundir, Rahul Devrani, Aman Arora, Manish Pandey, Romulus Costache, and Saeid Janizadeh 4.1 Introduction 49 4.2 Overview of Morphometry Tools and Toolboxes 50 4.3 Stand-Alone Tools 52 4.4 Tools that Run within Coding Bases 54 4.5 Conclusion 55 References 55 5 Landscape Modeling, Glacier and Ice Sheet Dynamics, and the Three Poles: A Review of Models, Softwares, and Tools 58 Satarupa Mitra, Rahul Devrani, Manish Pandey, Aman Arora, Romulus Costache, and Saeid Janizadeh 5.1 Introduction 58 5.2 Taxonomy 59 5.2.1 Geomorphic Process-Based Models 60 5.2.2 Classification Based on Process of Modeling 60 5.2.2.1 Based on Geomorphic Processes 60 5.2.2.2 Based on Modeling Process 60 5.3 Working Principles for Geomorphological Models 61 5.3.1 Soil Production 61 5.3.2 Hillslope Transport 62 5.3.3 Land Sliding 62 5.3.4 Fluvial Incision and Transport 62 5.3.5 Glacial Erosion 62 5.4 Landscape Evolution Models 63 5.4.1 DEM-Based Models 63 5.4.2 Siberia 63 5.4.3 Golem 64 5.4.4 Cascade 64 5.4.5 ZScape 64 5.4.6 Child 64 5.4.7 Caesar 65 5.4.8 Apero 65 5.4.9 SIGNUM (Simple Integrated Geomorphological Numerical Model) 65 5.4.10 TTLEM (TopoToolbox Landscape Evolution Model) 1.0 65 5.5 Other Models 65 5.5.1 Delim 65 5.5.2 Eros 66 5.5.3 Landscape Evolution Model Using Global Search 66 5.5.4 eSCAPE 66 5.5.5 r.sim.terrain 1.0 66 5.6 Combined/Application-Specific Models 66 5.7 Machine Learning Models 66 5.8 LEMs Developed for Glaciated Landscapes 66 5.9 Some Significant Glacier Evolution Models 68 5.10 Models Developed for Alpine Regions 71 5.11 Models Developed for the Arctic Regio 72 5.12 Models Developed for the Antarctic Region 72 5.13 Conclusion and Future Prospects 75 Acknowledgment 75 Declaration of Competing Interest 75 References 76 6 Spectral Indices Across Remote Sensing Platforms and Sensors Relating to the Three Poles: An Overview of Applications, Challenges, and Future Prospects 83 Mallikarjun Mishra, Kiran Kumari Singh, Prem C. Pandey, Rahul Devrani, Avinash Kumar Pandey, KN Prudhvi Raju, Prabhat Ranjan, Aman Arora, Romulus Costache, Saeid Janizadeh, Nguyen Thuy Linh, and Manish Pandey 6.1 Introduction 83 6.2 Database and Methodology 84 6.3 Rationale of Different Spectral Indices Across RS Sensors and Platforms 85 6.4 RS Sensors and Platforms: Characteristics (Spatial, Temporal, Spectral, and Radiometric Resolutions) 87 6.5 Most Widely and Popularly Used Spectral Indices 87 6.5.1 Spectral Indices and Lithosphere 87 6.5.2 Spectral Indices and Hydrosphere 88 6.5.3 Spectral Indices and Atmosphere 90 6.5.4 Spectral Indices and Biosphere 91 6.5.5 Spectral Indices and Anthroposphere 103 6.6 Thematic Evolution and Trends 105 6.6.1 Thematic and Network Maps 105 6.7 Summary and Recommendations 110 Acknowledgments 111 References 111 Section II Antarctica: the Southernmost Continent Having the South Pole Environment and Remote Sensing 117 7 Glacier Dynamics in East Antarctica: A Remote Sensing Perspective 119 Kiledar Singh Tomar, Sangita Singh Tomar, Ashutosh Venkatesh Prasad, and Alvarinho J. Luis 7.1 Introduction 119 7.2 Satellite Remote Sensing of Glacier Dynamics in East Antarctica 120 7.3 Glacier Velocity Estimation Using Remote Sensing 121 7.3.1 Glacier Velocity Estimation Using SAR Interferometry 121 7.3.2 Glacier Velocity Estimation Using Offset Tracking 121 7.4 Remote Sensing Based Dynamics of PRG: A Case Study 122 7.4.1 Data and Methods 123 7.4.2 Results and Discussion 123 7.4.2.1 Ice Front Location 123 7.4.2.2 Glacier Velocity Over the Period of 2016–2019 124 7.4.3 Summary and Conclusion 124 References 125 8 Terrestrial Deglaciation Signatures in East Antarctica 128 Uday Sharma, Yogesh Ray, and Manish Pandey 8.1 Introduction 128 8.2 Geomorphology 128 8.2.1 East Antarctica 129 8.3 Landform Variation Concerning Various Sectors and Elevation 132 8.3.1 Dronning Maud Land 132 8.3.2 Enderby Land 133 8.3.3 Mac. Robertson Land, Amery Ice Shelf, and Prince Elizabeth Land 133 8.3.4 Wilkes Land 135 8.4 Chronology 135 8.4.1 Dronning Maud Land 136 8.4.2 Enderby Land 137 8.4.3 Mac. Robertson Land, Amery Ice Shelf ’s and Princess Elizabeth Land 137 8.4.4 Wilkes Land 138 8.5 Discussion 138 8.6 Conclusion 139 Acknowledgments 140 References 140 9 Geospatial Tools for Monitoring Vertebrate Populations in Antarctica With a Note on the Ecological Component of the Indian Antarctic Program 144 Anant Pande, Ankita Anand, Shailendra Saini, and Kuppusamy Sivakumar 9.1 Introduction 144 9.2 Novel Geospatial Tools for Biodiversity Monitoring in Antarctica 145 9.2.1 Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 145 9.2.2 Satellite Imagery 147 9.3 Spatial Mapping of Seabirds Under the Indian Antarctic Program 149 9.4 Recommendations to Incorporate New Tools for Antarctic Wildlife Monitoring Program 151 9.5 Conclusion 152 Acknowledgments 152 References 152 10 Bryophytes of Larsemann Hills, East Antarctica and Future Prospects 155 Devendra Singh 10.1 Introduction 155 10.2 Study Area 156 10.3 Materials and Methods 156 10.4 Taxonomic Treatment 156 10.5 Phytosociological Studies 174 10.6 Results and Discussion 175 10.7 Future Prospects 175 Acknowledgments 177 References 177 11 Antarctic Sea Ice Variability and Trends Over the Last Four Decades 179 Swathi M., Juhi Yadav, Avinash Kumar, and Rahul Mohan 11.1 Introduction 179 11.2 Datasets and Methods 180 11.2.1 Sea Ice Extent Analysis 180 11.2.2 Analysis of Physical Parameters 181 11.3 Results and Discussion 182 11.3.1 Sea Ice Variability in the Southern Ocean 182 11.3.2 Sea Ice Distribution With Respect to Ocean-Atmospheric Temperature 182 11.4 Summary and Conclusions 187 Acknowledgments 188 References 189 Section III Himalayas: The Third Pole Environment and Remote Sensing 191 12 Some Unresolved Problems in the Himalaya: A Synoptic View 193 Om N. Bhargava 12.1 Introduction 193 12.2 Stratigraphic Ages, Basin Configuration, and Palaeontology 193 12.3 Sedimentology 195 12.4 Tectonics and Structure 195 12.5 Magmatism and Geochronology 196 12.6 Metamorphism 196 12.7 Mineral Deposits 196 12.8 Palaeomagnetic Studies 197 12.9 Glaciological Studies 197 12.10 Geomorphological Studies 197 12.11 Conclusion 198 Acknowledgments 198 References 198 13 Fluctuations of Kolahoi Glacier, Kashmir Valley, Its Assessment With Tree-Rings of Pinus wallichiana and Comparable Satellite Imageries and Field Survey Records 203 Uttam Pandey, Santosh K. Shah, and Nivedita Mehrotra 13.1 Introduction 203 13.2 Tree-Ring Sampling Site and Data Acquisition 204 13.3 Tree-Ring Chronology and Its Assessments 206 13.4 Fluctuations of Kolahoi Glacier: Existing Records and Its Assessment With Tree-Rings 207 13.5 Conclusions 210 Acknowledgements 210 References 210 14 Applications of ICESat-2 Photon Data in the Third Pole Environment 213 Giribabu Dandabathula 14.1 Introduction 213 14.2 Brief Background About NASA’s ICESat-2 Mission 214 14.3 Terrain Profiling From ICESat-2 Photon Elevations Over a Mountainous Region 216 14.4 Longitudinal Profiling of Rivers in a Mountainous Region 216 14.5 Inland Water Level Detection in Mountainous Regions Using ICESat-2 Photon Data 216 14.6 Inferring Annual Variations of Water Levels in Mountain Lakes Using ICESat-2’s ATL13 Data Product 218 14.7 Inferring Lake Ice Phenology in Mountainous Regions Using ICESat-2 Photon Data 221 14.8 Estimating Tree Heights in Mountain Regions Using ICESat-2 Photon Data 223 14.9 Utilization of ICESat-2 Photon Data to Generate Digital Elevation Models 223 14.10 Conclusion 225 Acknowledgments 226 References 226 15 Extreme Hydrological Event-Induced Temporal Variation in Soil Erosion of the Assiganga River Basin, NW Himalaya 230 Rohit Kumar, Rahul Devrani, Astha Dangwal, Benidhar Deshmukh, and Som Dutt 15.1 Introduction 230 15.2 Study Area 231 15.3 Methodology and Dataset 233 15.3.1 Soil Erodibility (K Factor) 234 15.3.2 Rainfall Erosivity (R Factor) 234 15.3.3 Slope Length and Steepness Factor (LS Factor) 235 15.3.4 Crop Management (C Factor) and Support Practices (P Factor) 237 15.4 Results and Discussion 239 15.4.1 Pre-Post R, C, and P Variation 239 15.4.2 Soil Loss Spatial Pattern and Extent 240 15.5 Conclusion 243 Acknowledgments 243 References 243 16 Understanding the Present and Past Climate-Human-Vegetation Dynamics in the Indian Himalaya: A Comprehensive Review 247 Mehta Bulbul, Yadav Ankit, Aljasil Chirakkal, Ambili Anoop, and Praveen K. Mishra 16.1 Introduction 247 16.2 Study Site 248 16.3 Climate Vegetation Interaction in the Indian Himalaya 248 16.3.1 Present-Day Conditions 248 16.3.2 The Holocene Epoch 249 16.3.2.1 Western Himalaya 249 16.3.2.2 Eastern Himalaya 252 16.3.2.3 Central Himalaya 253 16.4 Conclusions 253 References 254 17 Flash Flood Susceptibility Mapping of a Himalayan River Basin Using Multi-Criteria Decision-Analysis and GIS 257 Pratik Dash, Kasturi Mukherjee, and Surajit Ghosh 17.1 Introduction 257 17.2 Study Area 258 17.3 Data and Methodology 259 17.3.1 Data 259 17.3.2 Multicriteria Analysis 259 17.3.3 Selection and Classification of Flood Predictors 259 17.3.4 Flood Hazard Index 260 17.3.5 Validation 260 17.4 Results and Discussion 260 17.4.1 Flood Controlling Factors 260 17.4.2 Multicriteria Analysis 264 17.4.3 Flood Susceptibility Mapping 264 17.4.4 Validation 265 17.5 Conclusion 266 References 266 18 The Role of Himalayan Frontal Thrust in the Upliftment of Kimin Formation and the Migration of Sedimentary Basin in Arunachal Himalaya, Around Bandardewa, Papumpare District, Arunachal Pradesh 268 Mondip Sarma, Sajeed Zaman Borah, Devojit Bezbaruah, Tapos Kumar Goswami, and Upendra Baral 18.1 Introduction 268 18.2 Geology 269 18.2.1 Siwaliks of Arunachal Himalaya 269 18.2.2 Geology of the Study Area 269 18.3 Materials and Method 272 18.4 Study of Alluvial Fan 273 18.4.1 Description of Lithosections 273 18.4.1.1 Kimin Formation 273 18.4.1.2 Terrace Deposits 274 18.4.2 Grain Size Analysis 275 18.4.3 Cumulative Curve 275 18.4.4 Calculation of Size Parameters 275 18.4.4.1 Graphic Mean 275 18.4.4.2 Graphic Standard Deviations 275 18.4.4.3 Graphic Skewness 275 18.4.4.4 Graphic Kurtosis 275 18.4.5 Inter-Relationship of Size Parameters 275 18.4.6 cm Plot 278 18.5 Discussion and Conclusions 279 Acknowledgments 280 References 280 19 Himalayan River Profile Sensitivity Assessment by Validating of DEMs and Comparison of Hydrological Tools 283 Rahul Devrani, Rohit Kumar, Maneesh Kuruvath, Parv Kasana, Shailendra Pundir, Manish Pandey, and Sukumar Parida 19.1 Introduction 283 19.2 Study Area 284 19.3 Methodology (LSDTopoTools) 284 19.4 Details of DEM Datasets Used 286 19.4.1 Alos-palsar 286 19.4.2 Aster 286 19.4.3 CartoDEM 287 19.4.4 Copernicus DEM 287 19.4.5 Nasa Dem 287 19.4.6 Srtm 289 19.5 Result and Discussion 289 19.5.1 Assessment of DEMs Generated Watershed Boundary and Slope 289 19.5.2 Sensivity of Longitudinal River Profiles Using Different DEMs 289 19.6 Conclusion 295 Acknowledgments 295 References 295 20 Glacier Ice Thickness Estimation in Indian Himalaya Using Geophysical Methods: A Brief Review 299 Aditya Mishra, Harish Chandra Nainwal, and R. Shankar 20.1 Introduction 299 20.2 Geophysical Methods for Estimation of Glacier Ice Thickness 300 20.2.1 Gravity 300 20.2.2 Magnetic 300 20.2.3 Resistivity 300 20.2.4 Seismic 300 20.2.5 Ground Penetrating Radar 300 20.3 Geophysical Methods in the Indian Himalaya Region 300 20.4 GPR Surveys in the Debris Covered Glaciers 302 20.5 A Case Study on Debris-Covered Satopanth Glacier 303 20.6 Conclusions and Future Prospects 304 Acknowledgments 304 References 305 21 Landscapes and Paleoclimate of the Ladakh Himalaya 308 Anil Kumar, Rahul Devrani, and Pradeep Srivastava 21.1 Introduction 308 21.2 Geology of the Ladakh Himalaya 308 21.2.1 Karakoram Region 310 21.3 Past Climate Variability 310 21.3.1 Early Holocene (~11.7 to 8.2 ka) 310 21.3.2 Mid-Holocene (~8.2–4.2 ka) 310 21.3.3 Late-Holocene (~4.2 ka–Present) 311 21.4 Modern Climatic and Vegetation 311 21.5 Landscapes in the Ladakh Region 312 21.6 Glaciation and Associated Landforms 315 21.7 Flood History and Disaster 315 21.8 Conclusion 316 Acknowledgment 316 References 316 22 A Review of Remote Sensing and GIS-Based Soil Loss Models With a Comparative Study From the Upper and Marginal Ganga River Basin 321 Rohit Kumar, Rahul Devrani, and Benidhar Deshmukh 22.1 Introduction 321 22.2 Geospatial Models 323 22.2.1 USLE (Universal Soil Loss Equation) 324 22.2.2 RUSLE (Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation) 324 22.2.2.1 Rainfall Erosivity Factor “R” 325 22.2.2.2 Soil Erodibility “K” 325 22.2.2.3 Slope Length and Steepness “LS” 325 22.2.2.4 Crop Management (C) 326 22.2.2.5 Support Practices “P” 326 22.2.3 MUSLE (Modified Universal Soil Loss Equation) 326 22.3 A Case Study in Upper and Marginal Ganga River Basins Using RUSLE Model 326 22.3.1 Study Area (Upper and Marginal Ganga River Basins) 326 22.3.2 Dataset and Methodology 327 22.3.3 Rate of Soil Loss in Rishiganga Basin (RG) 328 22.3.4 Rate of Soil Loss in Lower Chambal Basin (LC) 329 22.4 Discussion 331 22.5 Conclusion 333 Acknowledgments 334 References 334 23 Wetlands as Potential Zones to Understand Spatiotemporal Plant-Human-Climate Interactions: A Review on Palynological Perspective from Western and Eastern Himalaya 340 Sandhya Misra, Anupam Sharma, Ravi Shankar Maurya, and Krishna G. Misra 23.1 Introduction 340 23.2 Importance of Wetlands 340 23.3 Climate of Himalaya 341 23.4 Vegetation Types in the Himalayan Region 341 23.5 Wetlands as Sites for Floristic Analysis 341 23.6 Wetlands as Sites for Past Vegetation-Climate-Human Interaction 342 23.7 Conclusions 347 Acknowledgments 348 References 348 24 Investigation of Land Use/Land Cover Changes in Alaknanda River Basin, Himalaya During 1976–2020 351 Varun Narayan Mishra 24.1 Introduction 351 24.2 Materials and Methods 352 24.2.1 Study Area 352 24.2.2 Data Used 352 24.2.3 Methods 353 24.2.3.1 LULC Classification Scheme 353 24.2.3.2 LULC Change Investigation 353 24.3 Results and Discussion 353 24.3.1 LULC Status 354 24.3.2 LULC Change 354 24.4 Conclusions 355 References 355 Section IV the Arctic: the Northernmost Ocean Having the North Pole Environment and Remote Sensing 357 25 Hydrological Changes in the Arctic, the Antarctic, and the Himalaya: A Synoptic View from the Cryosphere Change Perspective 359 Shyam Ranjan, Manish Pandey, and Rahul Raj 25.1 Introduction 359 25.2 Cryosphere and Its Influence on Socio-Ecological-Economical (GLASOECO) System 360 25.2.1 Cryospheric Change and Its Influence on Agriculture and Livestock 360 25.2.2 Cryospheric Change and Its Influence on Ecosystem and Environment 361 25.2.3 Cryospheric Change and Its Influence on the Economy 362 25.2.4 Cryospheric Change as a Risk to Energy Security 362 25.3 Hydrological Changes in the Arctic and the Antarctic Regions 363 25.3.1 Hydrological Changes in the Arctic 363 25.3.2 Hydrological Changes in the Antarctic 363 25.4 Hydrological Changes in the Third Pole (Himalaya) 363 25.4.1 Runoff Flooding 364 25.4.2 Future Hydrological Change in the Third Pole 364 25.5 Conclusion 365 Acknowledgments 365 References 365 26 High-Resolution Remote Sensing for Mapping Glacier Facies in the Arctic 371 Shridhar Digambar Jawak, Sagar Filipe Wankhede, Alvarinho J. Luis, and Keshava Balakrishna 26.1 Introduction 371 26.1.1 Glacier Facies Mapping Using Multispectral Data 372 26.1.2 Image Classification 372 26.1.3 Training Samples and Operator Skill 373 26.1.4 The Test of Operator Influence 373 26.2 The Geographical Area and Geospatial Data 374 26.3 Methodology 374 26.3.1 Radiometric Calibration and Digitization 375 26.3.2 Operator Selections 376 26.3.3 Classification and Reference Point Selection 376 26.4 Results and Discussion 376 26.5 Inferences and Recommendations 378 26.6 Conclusion 378 References 378 27 Supraglacial Lake Filling Models: Examples From Greenland 381 Prateek Gantayat 27.1 Introduction 381 27.2 Methods 381 27.2.1 Supraglacial Lake FillING (SLING) 381 27.2.2 Surface Routing and Lake Filling Model (SRLF) 383 27.2.3 Surface Routing and Lake Filling With Channel Incision (SRLFCI) 384 27.3 Study Area 384 27.4 Data Used 384 27.5 Results 386 27.5.1 Results For SLING Model 386 27.5.2 Results For SRLF Model 387 27.5.3 Results For SRLFCI Model 387 27.6 Discussion 387 27.7 Conclusions 388 Acknowledgments 388 References 388 28 Arctic Sea Level Change in Remote Sensing and New Generation Climate Models 390 S. Chatterjee, R.P. Raj, A. Bonaduce, and R. Davy 28.1 Introduction 390 28.2 Remote Sensing of Arctic Ocean Sea-Level Changes 390 28.3 Results and Discussion 392 28.3.1 Observed Trend and Variability 392 28.3.2 Arctic Ocean Sea Level and Large-Scale Atmospheric and Ocean Circulation 392 28.3.3 Arctic Ocean Sea Level in CMIP6 395 28.4 Conclusions 396 Acknowledgments 398 References 398 29 Spatio-Temporal Variations of Aerosols Over the Polar Regions Based on Satellite Remote Sensing 401 Rohit Srivastava 29.1 Introduction 401 29.2 Data and Methodology 402 29.3 Results and Discussion 403 29.3.1 Seasonal Variations of Relative Humidity (RH) Over Northern and Southern Polar Regions 403 29.3.1.1 Arctic 403 29.3.1.2 Antarctic 403 29.3.2 Seasonal Variations of Winds over Northern and Southern Polar Regions 404 29.3.2.1 Arctic 404 29.3.2.2 Antarctic 405 29.3.3 Seasonal Variations of Global Fire Activities 405 29.3.4 Aerosol Variations Over the Northern and Southern Polar Region 407 29.3.5 Seasonal Aerosol Variations Over the Northern and Southern Polar Regions 407 29.3.5.1 Arctic 407 29.3.5.2 Antarctic 408 29.4 Conclusions 409 Acknowledgments 410 References 410 Section V the Research Institutions on the “three Poles,” Data Pools, Data Sharing Policies, Career in Polar Science Research and Challenges 413 30 Multi-Disciplinary Research in the Indian Antarctic Programme and Its International Relevance 415 Anand K. Singh, Yogesh Ray, Shailendra Saini, Rahul Mohan, and M. Javed Beg 30.1 Introduction 415 30.2 India in the International Bodies for Antarctica 415 30.3 Multi-Disciplinary Antarctic Research in the Last Decade 416 30.4 International Relevance 417 30.5 Concluding Remarks 418 References 418 31 Indian and International Research Coordination in the Arctic 420 Archana Singh, David T. Divya, and K.P. Krishnan 31.1 The Changing Arctic and Inherited Interest 420 31.2 International Research Coordination 421 31.3 Arctic Research Coordination at the National Level 422 31.4 Coordination Among Students, Young Researchers, and Educators 424 Acknowledgments 425 Declaration of Competing Interest 425 References 425 Index 427

Read more less

Book SynopsisANTENNA AND ARRAY TECHNOLOGIES FOR FUTURE WIRELESS ECOSYSTEMS Discover a timely and accessible resource on the latest antenna research driving new developments in the field In Antenna and Array Technologies for Future Wireless Ecosystems, distinguished academics and authors Drs. Y. Jay Guo and Richard W. Ziolkowski deliver a cutting-edge resource for researchers, academics, students, and engineers who need the latest research findings on the newest challenges facing antenna designers who will be creating the technology that drives future 6G and beyond wireless systems and networks. This timely and impactful book offers the fundamental knowledge that will facilitate new research activities in the antennas and applied electromagnetics communities, and conveys innovative and practical solutions to many wireless industry problems. Its international cohort of leading authors delivers their findings on a variety of advanced topics in antenna and array research, Table of ContentsChapter 1 Surface-Wave Based Metasurface AntennasEnrica Martini, Marco Faenzi, David González-Ovejero, and Stefano Maci Chapter 2 Techniques for Designing High Gain and Two-Dimensional Beam Scanning Antennas for 5GRaj Mittra, Abdelkhalek Nasri, Ravi Kumar Arya, Prashant Chaudhary, James R Kelly, Shaker Alkaraki, Alejandro L. Borja Chapter 3 Low-cost Beam-Reconfigurable Directional Antennas for Advanced CommunicationsQi Luo, Steven Gao, Xue-xia Yang, Josaphat Tetuko Sri Sumantyo Chapter 4 Smart Leaky-Wave Antennas for Iridescent IoT Wireless NetworksJosé Luis Gómez-Tornero Chapter 5 Antenna-in-Package Design for Wireless System on a ChipY. P. Zhang Chapter 6 Terahertz Lens AntennasGeng-Bo Wu, Kwun Wing Cheung, Ka Fai Chan and Chi-Hou Chan Chapter 7 Photonics-Based Millimeter-Wave Band Remote Beamforming of Antenna Arrays Integrated with PhotodiodesShigeyuki Akiba and Jiro Hirokawa, Tokyo Institute of Technology, Japan Chapter 8 Contemporary Array Analysis Using Embedded Element PatternsDavid B. Davidson and Karl F. Warnick Chapter 9 Angle-of-Arrival Estimation in Large-Scale Hybrid Antenna ArraysKai Wu and Y. Jay Guo Chapter 10 Electrically Small Antenna Advances for Current 5G and Evolving 6G and Beyond Wireless SystemsRichard W. Ziolkowski Chapter 11 Overview of Rydberg Atom-Based Sensors/Receivers for the Detection of Electric Fields, Power and Modulated SignalsChristopher L. Holloway, Matthew T. Simons, Alexandra B. Artusio-Glimpse and Joshua A. Gordon Chapter 12 Quantum Antenna ArraysIñigo Liberal and Richard W. Ziolkowski

Read more less

Book SynopsisMachine Learning Algorithms for Signal and Image Processing Enables readers to understand the fundamental concepts of machine and deep learning techniques with interactive, real-life applications within signal and image processing Machine Learning Algorithms for Signal and Image Processing aids the reader in designing and developing real-world applications using advances in machine learning to aid and enhance speech signal processing, image processing, computer vision, biomedical signal processing, adaptive filtering, and text processing. It includes signal processing techniques applied for pre-processing, feature extraction, source separation, or data decompositions to achieve machine learning tasks. Written by well-qualified authors and contributed to by a team of experts within the field, the work covers a wide range of important topics, such as: Speech recognition, image reconstruction, object classification and detection, and text processing Healthcare monitoring, biomedical systTable of ContentsSection-1 Machine & Deep Learning techniques for Image Processing 1.1 Image Features in Machine Learning 1.2 Image Segmentation and Classification using Deep Learning 1.3 Deep Learning based Synthetic Aperture Radar Image Classification 1.4 Design Perspectives of Multitask Deep Learning Models and Applications 1.5 Image Reconstruction using Deep Learning 1.6 Machine and Deep Learning Techniques for Image Super-Resolution Section-2 Machine & Deep Learning techniques for Text and Speech Processing 2.1 Machine and Deep Learning Techniques for Text and Speech Processing 2.2 Manipuri Handwritten Script Recognition using Machine and Deep Learning 2.3 Comparison of Different Text Extraction Techniques for Complex Color Images 2.4 Smart Text Reader System for Blind Person using Machine and Deep Learning 2.5 Machine Learning Techniques for Deaf People 2.6 Design and Development of Chatbot based on Reinforcement Learning 2.7 DNN based Speech Quality Enhancement and Multi-speaker Separation for Automatic Speech Recognition System 2.8 Design and Development of Real-Time Music Transcription using Digital Signal Processing Section-3 Applications of Signal and Image Processing with Machine & Deep learning techniques 3.1 Role of Machine Learning in Wrist Pulse Analysis 3.2 An Explainable Convolutional Neural Network based Method for Skin Lesion Classification from Dermoscopic Images 3.3 Future of Machine-Learning and Deep-Learning in Health-Care Monitoring System 3.4 Usage of AI & Wearable IoT Devices for Healthcare Data: A Study 3.5 Impact of IoT in Biomedical Applications using Machine and Deep Learning 3.6 Wireless Communications using Machine Learning and Deep Learning 3.7 Applications of Machine Learning and Deep Learning in Smart Agriculture 3.8 Structural Damage Prediction from Earthquakes using Deep Learning 3.9 Machine Learning and Deep Learning Techniques in Social Sciences 3.1O Green Energy using Machine and Deep Learning 3.11 Light Deep CNN Approach for Multi-Label Pathology Classification using Frontal Chest X-Ray Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisFrom 5G to 6G Understand the transition to the sixth generation of wireless with this bold introduction The transition from the fifth generation of wireless communication (5G) to the coming sixth generation (6G) promises to be one of the most significant phases in the history of telecommunications. The technological, social, and logistical challenges promise to be significant, and meeting these challenges will determine the future of wireless communication. Experts and professionals across dozens of fields and industries are beginning to reckon seriously with these challenges as the 6G revolution approaches. From 5G to 6G provides an overview of this transition, offering a snapshot of a moment in which 5G is establishing itself and 6G draws ever nearer. It focuses on recent advances in wireless technology that brings 6G closer to reality, as well as the near-term challenges that still have to be met for this transition to succeed. The result is an essential book for anyone wishing to understand the future of wireless telecommunications in an increasingly connected world. From 5G to 6G readers will also find: 6G applications to both AI and Machine Learning, technologies which loom ever larger in wireless communicationDiscussion of subjects including smart healthcare, cybersecurity, extended reality, and moreTreatment of the ongoing infrastructural and technological requirements for 6G From 5G to 6G is essential for researchers and academics in wireless communication and computer science, as well as for undergraduates in related subjects and professionals in wireless-adjacent fields.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv 1 Technologies and Development for the Next Information Age 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Roadmap to 6G 1 1.2.1 Society 5.0 4 1.2.2 Extended Reality 4 1.2.3 Wireless Brain-Computer 5 1.2.4 Haptic Communication 5 1.2.5 Smart Healthcare 5 1.2.6 Five-Sense Information 6 1.2.7 The Internet of Everything 6 1.2.8 5G to 6G 6 1.3 AI and Cybersecurity: Paving the Way for the Future 10 1.4 Fusion of IoT, AI, and Cybersecurity 10 1.4.1 Where Did AI Begin? 12 1.4.2 Role of AI 12 1.4.3 Disadvantages of AI 12 1.4.4 Advantages of AI 12 1.4.5 Threats from Hackers 14 1.5 How AI Can Help Solve These Problems 15 1.6 Connected Devices and Cybersecurity 16 1.7 Solutions for Data Management in Cybersecurity 17 1.8 Conclusion 17 References 18 2 Networks of the Future 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 The Motive for Energy-Efficient ICTs 22 2.2.1 Approaches 23 2.3 Wireless Networks 24 2.3.1 Wi-Fi 26 2.3.2 Lte 28 2.3.3 Heterogeneous Networks 29 2.3.4 Femtocell Repeater 29 2.3.5 The Dawn of 5G Wireless Systems 30 2.3.6 Advancing from 5G to 6G Networks 32 2.4 Cognitive Networking 33 2.4.1 Zero-Touch Network and Service Management 34 2.4.2 Zero-Trust Networking 35 2.4.3 Information-Centric Networking 35 2.4.3.1 Basic Concepts of ICN 36 2.4.4 In-Network Computing 36 2.4.5 Active Networking 36 2.5 Mobile Edge Computing 37 2.6 Quantum Communications 37 2.6.1 Quantum Computing and 6G Wireless 38 2.7 Cybersecurity of 6G 38 2.8 Massive Machine-Type Communications (MTC) 39 2.9 Edge-Intelligence and Pervasive Artificial Intelligence in 6G 40 2.10 Blockchain: Foundations and Role in 6G 40 2.11 Role of Open-Source Platforms in 6G 40 2.11.1 PHY Technologies for 6G Wireless 40 2.11.2 Reconfigurable Intelligent Surface for 6G Wireless Networks 41 2.11.3 Millimeter-Wave and Terahertz Spectrum for 6G Wireless 41 2.11.4 Challenges in Transport Layer for Terabit Communications 41 2.11.5 High-Capacity Backhaul Connectivity for 6G Wireless 42 2.11.6 Cloud-Native Approach for 6G Wireless Networks 42 2.11.7 Machine Type Communications in 6G 42 2.11.8 Impact of 5G and 6G on Health and Environment 42 2.12 Integration of 5G with AI and IoT and Roadmap to 6G 43 2.13 3gpp 47 2.14 Conclusion 49 References 49 3 The Future of Wireless Communication with 6G 53 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 Recent Trends Leading to 6G Technology Evolution 53 3.3 Security and Privacy Challenges in 6G Wireless Communications 53 3.4 The Impact of 6G on Healthcare Systems 56 3.5 The Impact of 6G on Space Technology and Satellite Communication 58 3.6 The Impact of 6G on Other Industries 60 3.7 Terahertz Wireless Systems and Networks with 6G 61 3.8 The Future of 6G and Its Role in IT 62 References 62 4 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning in the Era of 5G and 6G Technology 65 4.1 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning: Definitions, Applications, and Challenges 66 4.1.1 Application of Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence 66 4.1.2 Challenges for Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence 66 4.2 Artificial Intelligence: Laws, Regulations, and Ethical Issues 67 4.2.1 Ethical Governance in Artificial Intelligence 67 4.2.2 The Future of Regulation for AI 67 4.3 Potentials of Artificial Intelligence in Wireless 5G and 6G: Benefits and Challenges 68 4.3.1 Artificial Intelligence in Wireless 5G and 6G 68 4.3.2 Benefits and Challenges of AI in 5G and 6G 68 4.3.3 How Can AI Be Used to Enhance 6G Wireless Security? 68 4.3.4 The 6G Era’s Edge Intelligence and Cloudification 69 4.3.5 Distributed Artificial Intelligence in 6G Security 69 4.4 Cybersecurity Issues in Advanced 5G and 6G 70 4.5 Benefits and Challenges of Using AI in Cybersecurity: Help or Hurt? 70 4.6 How Can AI Be Used by Hackers Attacking Networks? 71 4.7 Conclusion 72 References 72 5 6G Wireless Communication Systems: Emerging Technologies, Architectures, Challenges, and Opportunities 73 5.1 Introduction 73 5.2 Important Aspects of Sixth-Generation Communication Technology 73 5.2.1 A Much Higher Data Rate 74 5.2.2 A Much Lower Latency 74 5.2.3 Network Reliability and Accuracy 74 5.2.4 Energy Efficiency 74 5.2.5 Focus on Machines as Primary Users 74 5.2.6 AI Wireless Communication Tools 74 5.2.7 Personalized Network Experience 74 5.3 Enabling Technologies Behind the Drive for 6G 76 5.3.1 Artificial Intelligence 76 5.3.2 Terahertz Communications 78 5.3.3 Optical Wireless Technology 78 5.4 Extreme Performance Technologies in 6G Connectivity 79 5.4.1 Quantum Communication and Quantum ml 79 5.4.2 Blockchain 80 5.4.2.1 Internal Network Operations 80 5.4.2.2 Ecosystem for Productive Collaboration 80 5.4.2.3 Tactile Internet 80 5.4.2.4 Spectrum Sharing (FDSS) and Free Duplexing 80 5.5 6G Communications Using Intelligent Platforms 81 5.5.1 Integrated Intelligence 82 5.5.2 Satellite-Based Integrated Network 82 5.5.3 Wireless Information and Energy Transfer Are Seamlessly Integrated 83 5.6 Artificial Intelligence and a Data-Driven Approach to Networks 83 5.6.1 Zero-Touch Network 84 5.6.2 AI by Design 85 5.6.3 Technological Fundamentals for Zero-Touch Systems 85 5.7 Sensing for 6G 85 5.7.1 A Bandwidth as Well as Carrier Frequency Rise 85 5.7.2 Chip Technologies of the Future 86 5.7.3 Models of Consistent Channels 86 5.7.4 X-Haul and Transport Network for 6G 87 5.8 Applications 87 5.9 Innovative 6G Network Architectures 89 5.10 Conclusion 89 References 90 6 6G: Architecture, Applications, and Challenges 91 6.1 Introduction 91 6.2 6G Network Architecture Vision 93 6.2.1 6G Use Cases, Requirements, and Metrics 94 6.2.2 What 5G Is Currently Covering 95 6.3 6th Generation Networks: A Step Beyond 5G 97 6.3.1 6G and the Fundamental Features 98 6.4 Emerging Applications of 6G Wireless Networks 99 6.4.1 Virtual, Augmented, and Mixed Reality 99 6.4.2 Holographic Telepresence 100 6.4.3 Automation: The Future of Factories 101 6.4.4 Smart Lifestyle with the Integration of the Internet of Things 101 6.4.5 Autonomous Driving and Connected Devices 101 6.4.6 Healthcare 101 6.4.7 Nonterrestrial Communication 101 6.4.8 Underwater Communication 102 6.4.9 Disaster Management 102 6.4.10 Environment 102 6.5 The Requirements and KPI Targets of 6G 102 6.5.1 Extremely Low Latency 102 6.5.2 Low Power Consumption 102 6.5.3 High Data Rates 103 6.5.4 High-Frequency Bands 103 6.5.5 Ultra-Reliability 103 6.5.6 Security and Privacy 103 6.5.7 Massive Connection Density 104 6.5.8 Extreme Coverage Extension 104 6.5.9 Mobility 104 6.6 6G Applications 104 6.7 Challenges in 6G: Standardization, Design, and Deployment 104 References 106 7 Cybersecurity in Digital Transformation Era: Security Risks and Solutions 109 7.1 Introduction 109 7.2 Digital Transformation and Mesh Networks of Networks 109 7.3 Security as the Enemy of Digital Transformation 111 7.4 The Current State of Cybercrime 113 7.5 Security and Technologies of the Digital Transformation Economy 115 7.6 Tackling the Cybersecurity Maturity Challenges to Succeed with Digital Transformation 116 7.7 Security Maturity and Optimization: Perception versus Reality 117 7.7.1 Why Cybersecurity Maturity Is Not What It Should Be in the Digital Business and Transformation Reality 118 7.7.2 Why Cybersecurity Maturity and Strategy Are Lagging 119 7.8 Changing Security Parameters and Cyber Risks Demand a Holistic Security Approach for Digital Business 120 7.9 Cybersecurity Challenges and Digital Risks for the Future 121 7.10 Conclusion 122 References 122 8 Next Generations Networks: Integration, Trustworthiness, Privacy, and Security 125 8.1 Introduction 125 8.2 The State of 5G Networks 127 8.2.1 Applications and Services of 5G Technologies 128 8.3 6G: Key Technologies 130 8.4 6G: Application and Services 134 8.5 Benefits of 6G over 5G: A Comparison 135 8.5.1 Artificial Intelligence in 5G and 6G: Benefits and Challenges 135 8.5.2 Artificial Intelligence and Cybersecurity 136 8.5.3 Benefits and Challenges of AI and 6G for Cybersecurity as Defense and Offense 136 8.6 6G: Integration and Roadmap 137 8.7 Key Words in Safeguarding 6G 137 8.7.1 Trust 137 8.7.2 Security 137 8.7.3 Privacy 138 8.8 Trustworthiness in 6G 138 8.8.1 Is Trust Networking Needed? 138 8.8.2 Benefits of Trust Networking for 6G 138 8.8.3 Constraints of Trust Networking in 6G 138 8.8.4 Principles for Trust Networking 139 8.8.5 Challenges in Trust Networking for 6G 139 8.9 Network Security Architecture for 6G 140 8.9.1 Privacy and Security in IoT for 6G 140 8.10 6G Wireless Systems 141 8.10.1 Advances 141 8.10.2 Physical Layer Security as a Means of Confidentiality 142 8.10.3 Challenges of Implementing Federated Learning 143 8.10.4 Physical Layer Security for Six-Generation Connectivity 143 8.10.5 Physical Layer Security Using Light Communications 144 8.10.6 Challenges for Physical Layer Security 144 8.10.7 Privacy Requirements for 6G 145 8.10.8 Is Personal Information Really Personal? 145 8.11 Fifth Generation vs. Sixth Generation 145 8.12 Conclusion 146 References 147 9 Artificial Intelligence: Cybersecurity and Security Threats 149 9.1 Introduction 149 9.2 5G and 6G 150 9.3 Cybersecurity in Its Current State 151 9.4 AI as a Concept 153 9.5 AI: A Solution for Cybersecurity 154 9.6 AI: New Challenges in Cybersecurity 154 9.7 Conclusion 156 References 156 10 Impact of Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning on Cybersecurity 159 10.1 Introduction 159 10.2 What Is Artificial Intelligence (AI)? 160 10.2.1 Reactive Machines 160 10.2.2 Limited Memory 160 10.2.3 Theory of Mind 160 10.2.4 Self-Awareness 161 10.3 The Transformative Power of AI 161 10.4 Understanding the Relationship Between AI and Cybersecurity 161 10.5 The Promise and Challenges of AI for Cybersecurity 162 10.5.1 Risks and Impacts of AI on Cybersecurity (Threats and Solutions) 163 10.5.1.1 Domestic Risks 164 10.5.1.2 Local Risks 164 10.5.1.3 National Risks 164 10.5.1.4 Why Prediction and Prevention 164 10.6 Broad Domain of AI Security (Major Themes in the AI Security Landscape) 164 10.6.1 Digital/Physical 165 10.6.2 Protection from Malicious Use of AI and Automated Cyberattacks 165 10.6.3 Other Technologies with AI and Their Integration 165 10.6.4 Political 165 10.6.5 Manipulation and Disinformation Protection 165 10.6.6 Infrastructure Based on AI and Digital Expertise of Government 166 10.6.6.1 Economic 166 10.6.6.2 Labor Displacement and Its Mitigation 166 10.6.6.3 Promotion of AI R&D 166 10.6.6.4 Education and Training That Is Updated 167 10.7 Transparency of Artificial Intelligence and Accountability Societal Aspects 167 10.7.1 Rights of Privacy and Data 167 10.8 Global AI Security Priorities 168 10.8.1 Global Economy 168 10.8.2 Global Privacy and Data Rights 168 10.8.2.1 AI and Ethics 169 10.8.3 Automation of Cyberattacks or Social Engineering Attacks 170 10.8.4 Target Prioritizing with Machine Learning 170 10.9 Automation of Services in Cybercriminal Offense 170 10.9.1 Increased Scale of Attacks 170 10.10 The Future of AI in Cybersecurity 171 10.11 Conclusion 171 References 172 11 AI and Cybersecurity: Paving the Way for the Future 175 11.1 Introduction 175 11.2 IoT Security and the Role of AI 176 11.3 Cybercrime and Cybersecurity 179 11.4 How Can AI Help Solve These Problems? 181 11.5 The Realm of Cyberspace 181 11.6 Connected Devices and Cybersecurity 182 11.7 Solutions for Data Management in Cybersecurity 183 11.8 Conclusion 183 References 184 12 Future 6G Networks 185 12.1 Introduction 185 12.2 Vision, Challenges, and Key Features for Future 6G Networks 186 12.2.1 Fourth Generation Long-Term Evolution (4G-LTE) 187 12.3 Rationale for 6G Networks with Prevailing and Future Success of 5G 188 12.4 Missing Units from LTE and 5G That 6G Will Integrate 189 12.5 Features of 6G Networks 189 12.5.1 Large Bandwidth 189 12.5.2 Artificial Intelligence 189 12.5.3 Operational Intelligence 190 12.6 Wireless Networks 190 12.6.1 Beyond 5G and Toward 6G 190 12.6.2 Visible-Light Communications 191 12.6.3 E-MBB Plus 191 12.6.4 Big Communications 191 12.6.5 Secure Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications 192 12.6.6 Three-Dimensional Integrated Communications 192 12.6.7 Underwater Communication 193 12.6.8 Space Communication 194 12.6.9 UAV-Based Communication 194 12.6.10 Unconventional Data Communications 194 12.6.11 Tactical Communications 195 12.6.12 Holographic Communications 195 12.6.13 Human-Bond Communications 196 12.7 Challenges for 6G Networks 196 12.7.1 Potential Health Issues 196 12.7.2 Security and Privacy Concerns 197 12.7.3 Research Activities and Trends 197 12.8 Conclusion 198 References 200 Index 203

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn Introduction to Audio Content Analysis Enables readers to understand the algorithmic analysis of musical audio signals with AI-driven approaches An Introduction to Audio Content Analysis serves as a comprehensive guide on audio content analysis explaining how signal processing and machine learning approaches can be utilized for the extraction of musical content from audio. It gives readers the algorithmic understanding to teach a computer to interpret music signals and thus allows for the design of tools for interacting with music. The work ties together topics from audio signal processing and machine learning, showing how to use audio content analysis to pick up musical characteristics automatically. A multitude of audio content analysis tasks related to the extraction of tonal, temporal, timbral, and intensity-related characteristics of the music signal are presented. Each task is introduced from both a musical and a technical perspective, detailing the algorithmic approach as well as providing practical guidance on implementation details and evaluation. To aid in reader comprehension, each task description begins with a short introduction to the most important musical and perceptual characteristics of the covered topic, followed by a detailed algorithmic model and its evaluation, and concluded with questions and exercises. For the interested reader, updated supplemental materials are provided via an accompanying website. Written by a well-known expert in the music industry, sample topics covered in Introduction to Audio Content Analysis include: Digital audio signals and their representation, common time-frequency transforms, audio featuresPitch and fundamental frequency detection, key and chordRepresentation of dynamics in music and intensity-related featuresBeat histograms, onset and tempo detection, beat histograms, and detection of structure in music, and sequence alignmentAudio fingerprinting, musical genre, mood, and instrument classification An invaluable guide for newcomers to audio signal processing and industry experts alike, An Introduction to Audio Content Analysis covers a wide range of introductory topics pertaining to music information retrieval and machine listening, allowing students and researchers to quickly gain core holistic knowledge in audio analysis and dig deeper into specific aspects of the field with the help of a large amount of references.Table of ContentsAuthor Biography xvii Preface xix Acronyms xxi List of Symbols xxv Source Code Repositories xxix 1 Introduction 1 Part I Fundamentals of Audio Content Analysis 9 2 Analysis of Audio Signals 11 3 Input Representation 17 4 Inference 91 5 Data 107 Part II Music Transcription 127 7 Tonal Analysis 129 8 Intensity217 9 Temporal Analysis 229 10 Alignment 281 Part III Music Identification, Classification, and Assessment 303 11 Audio Fingerprinting 305 12 Music Similarity Detection and Music Genre Classification 317 13 Mood Recognition 337 14 Musical Instrument Recognition 347 15 Music Performance Assessment 355 Part IV Appendices 365 Appendix A Fundamentals 367 Appendix B Fourier Transform 385 Appendix C Principal Component Analysis 405 Appendix D Linear Regression 409 Appendix E Software for Audio Analysis 411 Appendix F Datasets 417 Index 425

Read more less

Book SynopsisDefected Ground Structure (DGS) Based Antennas A unique exploration of critical topics in defected ground structures and their applications In Defected Ground Structure (DGS) Based Antennas: Design Physics, Engineering, and Applications, three distinguished authors deliver a comprehensive discussion of key topics related to defected ground structures (DGSs) and their applications to advanced antenna designs, including microstrips, arrays, dielectric resonators, PIFA, and printed monopoles. The book explores major advances in the technology that have occurred since 2006, as well as the fundamentals of the research in the subject. It also presents future possibilities for new researchers to assist in the development of new studies and technologies for practicing engineers and developers. Readers will discover: A thorough introduction to the concept and evolution of defected ground structure-based antennas In-depth examinations of defectTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction to DGS: The Concept and Evolution 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Evolution of DGS 2 1.3 Definition and Basic Concept 5 1.4 Geometries and Classification 6 1.4.1 Unit Cell DGS 7 1.4.1.1 Dumbbell-Shaped DGS 7 1.4.1.2 Variations of Dumbbell-Shaped DGS 8 1.4.1.3 Spiral-Shaped DGS 12 1.4.1.4 Variations of Spiral-Shaped DGS 13 1.4.1.5 H-Shaped DGS 14 1.4.1.6 U- and V-Shaped DGSs 15 1.4.1.7 Ring-Shaped DGS 15 1.4.1.8 Other DGS Geometries 16 1.4.1.9 Tunable DGS Geometries 18 1.4.2 Periodic Uniform DGS 18 1.4.3 Periodic Nonuniform DGS 20 1.4.4 Asymmetric DGS 22 1.5 An Outline of Applications 23 References 24 2 Theoretical Analysis and Modeling 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 LC and RLC Modeling 35 2.2.1 Equivalent Circuit Parameter Extraction 37 2.2.2 Utilization of the Extracted LC for n-Pole DGS Filter Design 41 Trim Size: 6in x 9in Single Column Guha896180 ftoc.tex V1 - 10/10/2022 8:10pm Page vi [1] [1] [1] [1] vi Contents 2.2.3 RLC Circuit Modeling 43 2.3 LC Circuit Modeling: Variants and Improvements 44 2.3.1 Pi-Type Equivalent Circuit 44 2.3.2 Modeling of Spiral DGS with Periodic Resonance 46 2.3.3 Modeling of DGS with Aperiodic Stopbands 51 2.3.4 Some Modifications in Modeling Approach 54 2.4 Transmission Line Modeling 55 2.5 Quasistatic Modeling 59 2.5.1 Microstrip Gap Model 62 2.5.2 Microstrip Cross Junction Model 63 2.5.3 Modeling of the Rest Current Paths 64 2.6 Modeling of Isolated DGS for Antenna applications 66 2.7 Comments on the Modeling Techniques 68 References 69 3 DGS for Printed Antenna Feeds 73 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Impedance Matching of Antenna Feed Lines 73 3.3 Controlling the Harmonics in Printed Antennas 75 3.3.1 Suppression of Second Harmonic (2f 0) 77 3.3.2 Suppression up to Third Harmonic (3f 0) 79 3.3.3 Suppression up to Fourth Harmonic (4f 0) 84 3.4 Filtering Antenna Using DGS 86 3.5 Improved Isolation Between Antenna Ports 88 3.6 Improvement of Antenna Bandwidth 92 3.6.1 Lowering the Q-Factor 92 3.6.2 Adjusting Higher Resonances 94 3.7 Antenna Miniaturization 94 References 98 4 DGS to Control Orthogonal Modes in a Microstrip Patch for Cross-Pol Reduction 103 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Understanding of Radiating Modes in Microstrip Patches 103 4.2.1 Rectangular Patch 104 4.2.2 Circular Patch 106 4.3 WhatWere the Known Methods to Deal with the Cross-Polarized Fields? 110 4.4 Suppression of Cross-Polarized Fields by DGS Integration Technique: Coax-Fed Patches 112 Trim Size: 6in x 9in Single Column Guha896180 ftoc.tex V1 - 10/10/2022 8:10pm Page vii [1] [1] [1] [1] Contents vii 4.4.1 Controlling the OCDM and Cross-Polarized Radiations in E-Plane 112 4.4.2 Controlling of TM21 Mode and Cross-Polarized Radiations in Circular and Elliptical Patches 113 4.4.3 Controlling TM02 Mode in a Rectangular Patch and H-Plane Cross-Polarized Radiations 116 4.4.4 Visualization of the Modal Fields and the Effect of the DGSs 117 4.4.5 Universal DGS: Applicable to Both Circular and Rectangular Patch Geometries 123 4.4.6 DGS for Triangular Microstrip Patch 127 4.5 Suppression of Cross-Polarized Fields by DGS Integration Technique: Microstrip-Fed Patches 128 4.6 RecentWorks and New Trends 133 4.6.1 New DGS Geometries 133 4.6.2 New Design Concept of Substrate Field Symmetry 133 4.6.3 Reconfigurable Grid DGS 136 4.7 New Endeavor: Addressing XP Issues Across Skewed Radiation Planes 138 4.8 Practical Aspects of DGS-Integrated Antennas 140 References 141 5 Multi Parametric Cross-Polar Sources and DGS-Based Solution to All Radiation Planes 145 5.1 Background and Introduction 145 5.2 Mathematical Explanations of Cross-Polarized Fields 146 5.2.1 Sources of Ex and Ey Components 147 5.2.2 How to Combat Ey Components 149 5.3 Detailed Investigations in to the XP Sources 151 5.3.1 Rectangular Patch 151 5.3.2 Square and Circular Patches 159 5.4 DGS-Based Designs for Low XP in All Radiation Planes 159 5.4.1 Design of Microstrip Line-Fed Circular Patch Antenna 160 5.4.2 Design of a Coax-Fed Rectangular Patch 161 5.4.3 Designing a Patch with Non-proximal DGS 168 5.5 Conclusion 178 References 178 6 DGS-Based Low Cross-Pol Array Design and Applications 181 6.1 Introduction 181 6.2 Low Cross-Pol Microstrip Array Design 181 Trim Size: 6in x 9in Single Column Guha896180 ftoc.tex V1 - 10/10/2022 8:10pm Page viii [1] [1] [1] [1] viii Contents 6.2.1 Coax-Fed Microstrip Array 182 6.2.2 Microstrip Line-Fed Array 185 6.3 Array Design for Reduced Mutual Coupling 193 6.4 DGS-Based Array for Different Applications 193 6.4.1 Elimination of Scan Blindness 194 6.4.2 Millimeter-Wave Imaging with Suppressed XP 194 6.4.3 High-Performance Rectenna Array 196 6.4.4 Enhancement of Scanning Range 197 References 202 7 DGS Based Mutual Coupling Reduction: Microstrip Array, 5G/MIMO, and Millimeter Wave Applications 205 7.1 Introduction 205 7.2 Mutual Coupling Mechanisms 206 7.2.1 Mutual Coupling Through Radiations 206 7.2.2 Mutual Coupling by SurfaceWaves 207 7.2.3 Coupling Through Ground Plane Currents 208 7.3 Known Techniques to Control Mutual Coupling 208 7.4 DGS Based Solutions to Mutual Coupling 209 7.5 Major Applications 217 7.5.1 Elimination of Scan Blindness in Large Arrays 217 7.5.2 Enhancement of Scan Range in Phased Array 218 7.5.3 DGS Based Compact Antennas for 5G/MIMO/MillimeterWave Applications 221 7.6 Conclusion 231 References 232 8 DGS Applied to Circularly Polarized Antenna Design 239 8.1 Introduction 239 8.2 Basic Principle of CP Generation in a Microstrip Patch 239 8.3 Some Important Aspects and Challenges in CP Designs 242 8.4 DGS Integrated Single-Fed CP Antenna Design 243 8.4.1 Use of Slot-Type DGS 243 8.4.2 Use of Fractal DGS 245 8.4.3 Use of Grid DGS 247 8.4.4 Use of PIN Switch Integrated Reconfigurable DGS 249 8.5 DGS as a Supportive Component to CP Design 252 8.5.1 DGS for Improved Surface Current 252 8.5.2 DGS for Balanced Orthogonal Modes 252 8.5.3 DGS for Optimizing CP Bandwidth 254 8.5.4 DGS for Beam Squint Correction and Improved CP Quality 261 Trim Size: 6in x 9in Single Column Guha896180 ftoc.tex V1 - 10/10/2022 8:10pm Page ix [1] [1] [1] [1] Contents ix 8.6 Evolving Applications: DGS In SIW-Based CP Antennas 265 References 267 9 DGS Integrated Printed UWB Monopole Antennas 271 9.1 Introduction 271 9.2 Improved Impedance Bandwidth and Multiband Operation 272 9.2.1 Improved Impedance Matching of UWB Antennas 272 9.2.2 DGS Induced Resonances for Improved UWB Operation 277 9.3 Band Notch Characteristics in UWB Antennas 280 9.3.1 DGS Based UWB Antenna to Avoid Interference up to C-Band 280 9.3.2 UWB Antenna for Multi-Notch Band Extending to X-Band 286 9.4 Applications to Band Notch UWB MIMO Antennas 288 9.5 Time Domain Behavior of DGS Based UWB Monopole 293 9.6 Conclusion 295 References 296 Index 301

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis second edition of Adaptive Filters: Theory and Applications has been updated throughout to reflect the latest developments in this field; notably an increased coverage given to the practical applications of the theory to illustrate the much broader range of adaptive filters applications developed in recent years. The book offers an easy to understand approach to the theory and application of adaptive filters by clearly illustrating how the theory explained in the early chapters of the book is modified for the various applications discussed in detail in later chapters. This integrated approach makes the book a valuable resource for graduate students; and the inclusion of more advanced applications including antenna arrays and wireless communications makes it a suitable technical reference for engineers, practitioners and researchers. Key features: Offers a thorough treatment of the theory of adaptive signal processing; incorporating new material on Table of ContentsPreface xvii Acknowledgments xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Linear Filters 1 1.2 Adaptive Filters 2 1.3 Adaptive Filter Structures 3 1.4 Adaptation Approaches 7 1.5 Real and Complex Forms of Adaptive Filters 9 1.6 Applications 9 2 Discrete-Time Signals and Systems 28 2.1 Sequences and z-Transform 28 2.2 Parseval’s Relation 32 2.3 System Function 33 2.4 Stochastic Processes 35 Problems 44 3 Wiener Filters 48 3.1 Mean-Squared Error Criterion 48 3.2 Wiener Filter – Transversal, Real-Valued Case 50 3.3 Principle of Orthogonality 55 3.4 Normalized Performance Function 57 3.5 Extension to Complex-Valued Case 58 3.6 Unconstrained Wiener Filters 61 3.7 Summary and Discussion 79 Problems 80 4 Eigenanalysis and Performance Surface 90 4.1 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 90 4.2 Properties of Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 91 4.3 Performance Surface 104 Problems 112 5 Search Methods 119 5.1 Method of Steepest Descent 120 5.2 Learning Curve 126 5.3 Effect of Eigenvalue Spread 130 5.4 Newton’s Method 131 5.5 An Alternative Interpretation of Newton’s Algorithm 133 Problems 135 6 LMS Algorithm 139 6.1 Derivation of LMS Algorithm 139 6.2 Average Tap-Weight Behavior of the LMS Algorithm 141 6.3 MSE Behavior of the LMS Algorithm 144 6.4 Computer Simulations 156 6.5 Simplified LMS Algorithms 167 6.6 Normalized LMS Algorithm 170 6.7 Affine Projection LMS Algorithm 173 6.8 Variable Step-Size LMS Algorithm 177 6.9 LMS Algorithm for Complex-Valued Signals 179 6.10 Beamforming (Revisited) 182 6.11 Linearly Constrained LMS Algorithm 186 Problems 190 Appendix 6A: Derivation of Eq. (6.39) 205 7 Transform Domain Adaptive Filters 207 7.1 Overview of Transform Domain Adaptive Filters 208 7.2 Band-Partitioning Property of Orthogonal Transforms 210 7.3 Orthogonalization Property of Orthogonal Transforms 211 7.4 Transform Domain LMS Algorithm 213 7.5 Ideal LMS-Newton Algorithm and Its Relationship with TDLMS 215 7.6 Selection of the Transform T 216 7.7 Transforms 229 7.8 Sliding Transforms 230 7.9 Summary and Discussion 242 Problems 243 8 Block Implementation of Adaptive Filters 251 8.1 Block LMS Algorithm 252 8.2 Mathematical Background 255 8.3 The FBLMS Algorithm 260 8.4 The Partitioned FBLMS Algorithm 267 8.5 Computer Simulations 276 Problems 279 Appendix 8A: Derivation of a Misadjustment Equation for the BLMS Algorithm 285 Appendix 8B: Derivation of Misadjustment Equations for the FBLMS Algorithms 288 9 Subband Adaptive Filters 294 9.1 DFT Filter Banks 295 9.2 Complementary Filter Banks 299 9.3 Subband Adaptive Filter Structures 303 9.4 Selection of Analysis and Synthesis Filters 304 9.5 Computational Complexity 307 9.6 Decimation Factor and Aliasing 308 9.7 Low-Delay Analysis and Synthesis Filter Banks 310 9.8 A Design Procedure for Subband Adaptive Filters 313 9.9 An Example 316 9.10 Comparison with FBLMS Algorithm 318 Problems 319 10 IIR Adaptive Filters 322 10.1 Output Error Method 323 10.2 Equation Error Method 327 10.3 Case Study I: IIR Adaptive Line Enhancement 332 10.4 Case Study II: Equalizer Design for Magnetic Recording Channels 343 10.5 Concluding Remarks 349 Problems 352 11 Lattice Filters 355 11.1 Forward Linear Prediction 355 11.2 Backward Linear Prediction 357 11.3 Relationship Between Forward and Backward Predictors 359 11.4 Prediction-Error Filters 359 11.5 Properties of Prediction Errors 360 11.6 Derivation of Lattice Structure 362 11.7 Lattice as an Orthogonalization Transform 367 11.8 Lattice Joint Process Estimator 369 11.9 System Functions 370 11.10 Conversions 370 11.11 All-Pole Lattice Structure 376 11.12 Pole-Zero Lattice Structure 376 11.13 Adaptive Lattice Filter 378 11.14 Autoregressive Modeling of Random Processes 383 11.15 Adaptive Algorithms Based on Autoregressive Modeling 385 Problems 400 Appendix 11A: Evaluation of E[ua(n)xT(n)K(n)x(n)uTa (n)] 407 Appendix 11B: Evaluation of the parameter γ 408 12 Method of Least-Squares 410 12.1 Formulation of Least-Squares Estimation for a Linear Combiner 411 12.2 Principle of Orthogonality 412 12.3 Projection Operator 415 12.4 Standard Recursive Least-Squares Algorithm 416 12.5 Convergence Behavior of the RLS Algorithm 421 Problems 430 13 Fast RLS Algorithms 433 13.1 Least-Squares Forward Prediction 434 13.2 Least-Squares Backward Prediction 435 13.3 Least-Squares Lattice 437 13.4 RLSL Algorithm 440 13.5 FTRLS Algorithm 453 Problems 460 14 Tracking 463 14.1 Formulation of the Tracking Problem 463 14.2 Generalized Formulation of LMS Algorithm 464 14.3 MSE Analysis of the Generalized LMS Algorithm 465 14.4 Optimum Step-Size Parameters 469 14.5 Comparisons of Conventional Algorithms 471 14.6 Comparisons Based on Optimum Step-Size Parameters 475 14.7 VSLMS: An Algorithm with Optimum Tracking Behavior 477 14.8 RLS Algorithm with Variable Forgetting Factor 485 14.9 Summary 486 Problems 488 15 Echo Cancellation 492 15.1 The Problem Statement 492 15.2 Structures and Adaptive Algorithms 495 15.3 Double-Talk Detection 512 15.4 Howling Suppression 521 15.5 Stereophonic Acoustic Echo Cancellation 524 Appendix 15A: Multitaper method 542 Appendix 15B: Derivation of the Two-Channel Levinson–Durbin Algorithm 549 16 Active Noise Control 551 16.1 Broadband Feedforward Single-Channel ANC 553 16.2 Narrowband Feedforward Single-Channel ANC 559 16.3 Feedback Single-Channel ANC 573 16.4 Multichannel ANC Systems 577 Appendix 16A: Derivation of Eq. (16.46) 582 Appendix 16B: Derivation of Eq. (16.53) 583 17 Synchronization and Equalization in Data Transmission Systems 584 17.1 Continuous Time Channel Model 585 17.2 Discrete Time Channel Model and Equalizer Structures 589 17.3 Timing Recovery 593 17.4 Equalizers Design and Performance Analysis 606 17.5 Adaptation Algorithms 617 17.6 Cyclic Equalization 618 17.7 Joint Timing Recovery, Carrier Recovery, and Channel Equalization 628 17.8 Maximum Likelihood Detection 629 17.9 Soft Equalization 631 17.10 Single-Input Multiple-Output Equalization 643 17.11 Frequency Domain Equalization 645 17.12 Blind Equalization 649 Problems 654 18 Sensor Array Processing 659 18.1 Narrowband Sensor Arrays 660 18.2 Broadband Sensor Arrays 678 18.3 Robust Beamforming 683 Problems 692 19 Code Division Multiple Access Systems 695 19.1 CDMA Signal Model 695 19.2 Linear Detectors 699 19.3 Adaptation Methods 707 Problems 709 20 OFDM and MIMO Communications 711 20.1 OFDM Communication Systems 711 20.2 MIMO Communication Systems 730 20.3 MIMO–OFDM 743 Problems 743 References 746 Index 761

Read more less

Book SynopsisJOINT COMMUNICATIONS AND SENSING Authoritative resource systematically introducing JCAS technologies and providing valuable information and knowledge to researchers and engineers Based on over six years of dedicated research on joint communications and sensing (JCAS) by the authors, their collaborators, and students, Joint Communications and Sensing is the first book to comprehensively cover the subject of JCAS, which is expected to deliver huge cost and energy savings, and therefore has become a hallmark of future 6G and next generation radar technologies. The book has three parts. Part I presents the basic JCAS concepts and applications and the basic signal processing algorithms to support JCAS. Part II covers communications-centric JCAS designs that describe how sensing can be integrated into communications networks such as 5G and 6G. Part III presents ways to integrate communications in various radar sensing technologies and platforms.Table of ContentsAcknowledgments xiii Preface xv Acronyms xvii Part I Fundamentals of Joint Communications and Sensing (JCAS) 1 1 Introduction to Joint Communications and Sensing (JCAS) 3 1.1 Background 3 1.2 Three Categories of JCAS Systems 5 1.2.1 Major Differences Between Communications and Sensing 7 1.2.2 Communications-Centric Design 12 1.2.3 Radar-Centric Design 15 1.2.4 Joint Design without an Underlying System 17 1.2.5 Summary of Key Research Problems 18 1.3 Potential Sensing Applications of JCAS 18 1.4 Book Organization 22 References 24 2 Signal Processing Fundamentals for JCAS 31 2.1 Channel Model for Communications and Radar 31 2.2 Basic Communication Signals and Systems 33 2.2.1 Single-Carrier MIMO 33 2.2.2 MIMO-OFDM 34 2.2.3 Transmitter and Receiver Signal Processing in Communications 34 2.3 MIMO Radar Signals and Systems 36 2.3.1 Single-Carrier MIMO Radar 36 2.3.2 MIMO-OFDM Radar 37 2.3.3 FH-MIMO Radar 38 2.4 Basic Signal Processing for Radar Sensing 40 2.4.1 Matched Filtering 40 2.4.2 Moving Target Detection (MTD) 41 2.4.3 Spatial-Domain Processing 42 2.4.4 Target Detection 43 2.4.5 Spatial Refinement 44 2.5 Signal Processing Basics for Communication-Centric JCAS 44 2.5.1 802.11ad JCAS Systems 44 2.5.2 Mobile Network with JCAS Capabilities 46 2.5.3 Sensing Parameter Estimation 46 2.5.3.1 Direct and Indirect Sensing 47 2.5.3.2 Sensing Algorithms 49 2.6 Signal Processing Basics for DFRC 50 2.6.1 Embedding Information in RadarWaveform 50 2.6.2 Signal Reception and Processing for Communications 52 2.6.2.1 Demodulation 53 2.6.2.2 Channel Estimation 54 2.6.3 Codebook Design 54 2.7 Conclusions 55 References 55 3 Efficient Parameter Estimation 59 3.1 Q-Shifted Estimator (QSE) 60 3.2 Refined QSE (QSEr) 62 3.2.1 Impact ofq 62 3.2.2 Refined Optimalq 66 3.2.3 Numerical Illustration of QSEr 67 3.3 Padé approximation-Enabled Estimator 70 3.3.1 Core Updating Function 71 3.3.2 Initialization and Overall Estimation Procedure 74 3.3.3 Numerical Illustrations 76 3.4 Conclusions 80 References 80 Part II Communication-Centric JCAS 83 4 Perceptive Mobile Network (PMN) 85 4.1 Framework for PMN 85 4.1.1 System Platform and Infrastructure 86 Trim Size: 6in x 9in Single Column Wu982913 ftoc.tex V1 - 09/06/2022 5:13pm Page vii [1] [1] [1] [1] Contents vii 4.1.1.1 CRAN 87 4.1.1.2 Standalone BS 87 4.1.2 Three Types of Sensing Operations 88 4.1.2.1 Downlink Active Sensing 88 4.1.2.2 Downlink Passive Sensing 88 4.1.2.3 Uplink Sensing 89 4.1.2.4 Comparison 89 4.1.3 Signals Usable from 5G NR for Radio Sensing 90 4.1.3.1 Reference Signals Used for Channel Estimation 90 4.1.3.2 Nonchannel Estimation Signals 92 4.1.3.3 Data Payload Signals 92 4.2 System Modifications to Enable Sensing 92 4.2.1 Dedicated Transmitter for Uplink Sensing 93 4.2.2 Dedicated Receiver for Downlink (and Uplink) Sensing 94 4.2.3 Full-Duplex Radios for Downlink Sensing 94 4.2.4 Base Stations with Widely Separated Transmitting and Receiving Antennas 96 4.3 System Issues 98 4.3.1 Performance Bounds 98 4.3.2 Waveform Optimization 100 4.3.2.1 Spatial Optimization 102 4.3.2.2 Optimization in Time and Frequency Domains 105 4.3.2.3 Optimization with Next-Generation Signaling Formats 106 4.3.3 Antenna Array Design 106 4.3.3.1 Virtual MIMO and Antenna Grouping 107 4.3.3.2 Sparse Array Design 108 4.3.3.3 Spatial Modulation 109 4.3.3.4 Reconfigurable Intelligent Surface-Assisted JCAS 109 4.3.4 Clutter Suppression Techniques 110 4.3.4.1 Recursive Moving Averaging (RMA) 112 4.3.4.2 Gaussian Mixture Model (GMM) 113 4.3.5 Sensing Parameter Estimation 114 4.3.5.1 Periodogram such as 2D DFT 115 4.3.5.2 Subspace-Based Spectrum Analysis Techniques 115 4.3.5.3 On-Grid Compressive Sensing Algorithms 117 4.3.6 Resolution of Sensing Ambiguity 119 4.3.7 Pattern Analysis 122 4.3.8 Networked Sensing under Cellular Topology 123 4.3.8.1 Fundamental Theories and Performance Bounds for “Cellular Sensing Networks” 123 4.3.8.2 Distributed Sensing with Node Grouping and Cooperation 124 4.3.9 Sensing-Assisted Communications 124 4.3.9.1 Sensing-Assisted Beamforming 124 4.3.9.2 Sensing-Assisted Secure Communications 128 4.4 Conclusions 128 References 128 5 Integrating Low-Complexity and Flexible Sensing into Communication Systems: A Unified Sensing Framework 139 5.1 Problem Statement and Signal Model 139 5.1.1 Signal Model 140 5.1.2 Classical OFDM Sensing (COS) 142 5.1.3 Problem Statement 143 5.1.3.1 CP-limited Sensing Distance 143 5.1.3.2 Communication-limited Velocity measurement 143 5.1.3.3 COS adapted for DFT-S-OFDM 144 5.2 A Low-Complexity Sensing Framework 144 5.3 Performance Analysis 150 5.3.1 Preliminary Results 150 5.3.2 Analyzing Signal Components in Two RDMs 151 5.3.3 Comparison and Insights 154 5.3.4 Criteria for Setting Key Sensing Parameters 157 5.4 Simulation Results 158 5.4.1 Illustrating SINRs in RDMs 159 5.4.2 Illustration of Target Detection 162 5.5 Conclusions 166 References 167 6 Sensing Framework Optimization 169 6.1 Echo Preprocessing 169 6.1.1 Reshaping 170 6.1.2 Virtual Cyclic Prefix (VCP) 171 6.1.3 Removing Communication Information 174 6.2 Target Parameter Estimation 177 6.2.1 Parameter Estimation Method 177 6.2.2 Computational Complexity 181 6.3 Optimizing Parameters of Sensing Methods 182 6.3.1 Preliminary Results 183 6.3.2 Maximizing SINR for Parameter Estimation 184 6.4 Simulation Results 186 6.4.1 Comparison with Benchmark Method 186 Trim Size: 6in x 9in Single Column Wu982913 ftoc.tex V1 - 09/06/2022 5:13pm Page ix [1] [1] [1] [1] Contents ix 6.4.2 Wide Applicability 189 6.5 Conclusions 192 References 193 Part III Radar-Centric Joint Communications and Sensing 195 7 FH-MIMO Dual-Function Radar-Based Communications: Single-Antenna Receiver 197 7.1 Problem Statement 198 7.2 Waveform Design for FH-MIMO DFRC 199 7.2.1 FH-MIMO RadarWaveform 200 7.2.2 Overall Channel Estimation Scheme 202 7.2.2.1 Estimate Timing Offset 203 7.2.2.2 Estimate Channel Parameters 203 7.3 Estimating Timing Offset 203 7.3.1 Two Estimation Methods 204 7.3.2 Performance Analysis and Comparison of the Estimators 205 7.3.3 Design of a Suboptimal Hopping Frequency Sequence 208 7.4 Estimating Channel Response 209 7.4.1 Estimation Method 209 7.4.2 Complexity Analysis 210 7.5 Using Estimations in Data Communications 211 7.6 Extensions to Multipath Cases 212 7.7 Simulation Results 214 7.8 Conclusions 219 References 219 8 Frequency-Hopping MIMO Radar-Based Communications with Multiantenna Receiver 221 8.1 Signal Model 221 8.2 The DFRC Signal Mode 223 8.3 A Multiantenna Receiving Scheme 226 8.3.1 Estimating Channel Response 226 8.3.2 Estimating Timing Offset 227 8.3.2.1 Estimating L𝜂 228 8.3.2.2 Removing Estimation Ambiguity 229 8.3.3 Information Demodulation 230 8.3.3.1 Estimating khm 230 8.3.3.2 FHCS Demodulation 232 8.3.3.3 PSK Demodulation 232 8.4 Performance Analysis 232 8.4.1 Performance of Channel Coefficient Estimation 232 8.4.2 Performance of Timing Offset Estimation 233 8.4.3 Communication Performance 234 8.4.3.1 Achievable Rate 234 8.4.3.2 SER of PSK-Based FH-MIMO DFRC 234 8.5 Simulations 235 8.6 Conclusions 240 References 240 9 Integrating Secure Communications into Frequency Hopping MIMO Radar with Improved Data Rates 243 9.1 Signal Models and Overall Design 243 9.1.1 Signal Model of Bob 244 9.1.2 Signal Model of Eve 245 9.1.3 Overall Description 246 9.1.4 Maximum Achievable Rate (MAR) 247 9.2 Elementwise Phase Compensation 249 9.2.1 AoD-Dependence Issue of Hopping Frequency Permutation Selection (HFPS) Demodulation 249 9.2.2 Elementwise phase compensation and HFPS Demodulation at Bob 250 9.2.3 Enhancing Physical-Layer Security by Elementwise Phase Compensation 252 9.3 Random Sign Reversal 253 9.3.1 Random Sign Reversal and Maximum Likelihood (ML) Decoding 253 9.3.2 Detecting Random Sign Reversal at Bob 254 9.3.3 Random Sign Reversal Impact Analysis 255 9.3.4 Impact of Presented Design on Radar Performance 258 9.3.4.1 Impact of HFCS on R(𝜏) 258 9.3.4.2 Impact of HFPS on R(𝜏) 259 9.3.4.3 Impact of Elementwise Phase Compensation and Random Sign Reversal on R(𝜏) 259 9.3.4.4 Limitations of Presented Design for Radar Applications 260 9.3.5 Extension to Multipath and Multiuser Scenarios 260 9.3.5.1 Multipath Scenario 260 9.3.5.2 Multiuser Scenario 261 9.4 Simulation Results 261 9.5 Conclusions 267 References 267 Trim Size: 6in x 9in Single Column Wu982913 ftoc.tex V1 - 09/06/2022 5:13pm Page xi [1] [1] [1] [1] Contents xi A Proofs, Analyses, and Derivations 271 A.1 Proof of Lemma 5.1 271 A.2 Proof of Lemma 5.2 271 A.3 Proof of Lemma 5.3 272 A.4 Proof of Proposition 5.1 273 A.5 Proof of Proposition 5.2 274 A.6 Proof of Proposition 6.1 275 A.7 Deriving the Powers of the Four Terms of X̃ n[l] Given in (6.33) 277 A.8 Proof of Proposition 6.2 280 A.9 Proof of Proposition 6.3 281 A.10 Deriving (9.31) 282 References 283 Index 285

Read more less

Book Synopsis* Covers the mathematical and physical background that is needed to understand electromagnetic radiation and antennas * Discusses the origin of radiation and provides and in-depth explanation of antenna parameters * Explores all the necessary steps in antenna analysis allowing the reader .Trade Review“This book is a good reference for advanced students in antenna and RF engineering, wireless communications, electrical engineering, radio engineers and other professionals needing a reference on antenna theory. It will also be of interest to advanced or senior radio engineers, designers and developers as a practical guide and reference. It assumes knowledge of electromagnetic theory and vector analysis but is a good, compact reference book for antennas.” (Microwave Journal, 1 January 2013)Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi List of Abbreviations xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Early History of Antennas 1 1.2 Antennas and Electromagnetic Radiation 2 1.2.1 Electromagnetic Radiation 2 1.2.2 Short Wire Dipole Radiation 5 1.3 The Modern History of Antennas 6 1.4 Frequency Spectrum and Antenna Types 8 1.4.1 Dipole Antennas 8 1.4.2 Loop Antennas 9 1.4.3 Aperture Antennas 10 1.4.4 Reflector Antennas 10 1.4.5 Array Antennas 11 1.4.6 Modern Antennas 11 1.5 Organization of the Book 12 1.6 Problems 13 References 13 2 Antenna System-Level Performance Parameters 15 2.1 Radiation Pattern 15 2.1.1 Field Regions 16 2.1.2 Three-Dimensional Radiation Pattern 17 2.1.3 Planar Cuts 19 2.1.4 Power Patterns 22 2.1.5 Directivity and Gain 25 2.1.6 Antenna Beamwidth 28 2.2 Antenna Impedance and Bandwidth 29 2.3 Polarization 32 2.3.1 Elliptical Polarization 33 2.3.2 Circular Polarization 35 2.3.3 Linear Polarization 35 2.3.4 Axial Ratio 36 2.4 Antenna Effective Area and Vector Effective Length 38 2.4.1 Effective Area 38 2.4.2 Vector Effective Length 40 2.5 Radio Equation 41 2.6 Radar Equation 43 2.6.1 Radar Cross-Section 44 2.7 Problems 46 References 47 3 Vector Analysis 49 3.1 Addition and Subtraction 49 3.2 Products 50 3.2.1 Scalar Product or Dot Product 50 3.2.2 Vector Product or Cross Product 51 3.2.3 Triple Product 52 3.3 Differentiation 53 3.3.1 Gradient 54 3.3.2 Divergence 55 3.3.3 Curl 57 3.4 Problems 61 4 Radiated Fields 63 4.1 Maxwell Equations 63 4.2 Vector Potential 64 4.3 Far-Field Approximations 69 4.3.1 Magnetic Field 69 4.3.2 Electric Field 73 4.4 Reciprocity 75 4.4.1 Lorentz Reciprocity Theorem 75 4.4.2 Antenna Reciprocity 77 4.5 Problems 79 References 79 5 Dipole Antennas 81 5.1 Elementary Dipole 81 5.1.1 Radiation 82 5.1.2 Input Impedance 86 5.2 Non-Infinitesimal Dipole Antenna 87 5.2.1 Radiation 87 5.2.2 Input Impedance 96 5.3 Printed Monopole and Inverted-F Antennas 97 5.3.1 Application of Theory 98 5.3.2 Planar Monopole Antenna Design 99 5.3.3 Printed UWB Antenna Design 105 5.3.4 Miniature Monopole with Cable Current Suppression 113 5.3.5 Inverted-F Antenna Design 120 5.4 Problems 128 References 129 6 Loop Antennas 131 6.1 General Constant Current Loop 131 6.1.1 Radiation 132 6.1.2 Input Impedance 136 6.1.3 Small Loop Antenna 137 6.1.4 Comparison of Short Dipole and Small Loop Antenna 138 6.2 Printed Loop Antenna 139 6.2.1 Application of Theory 139 6.2.2 Design of a Printed Loop Antenna 143 6.3 Problems 149 References 152 7 Aperture Antennas 153 7.1 Magnetic Sources 154 7.2 Uniqueness Theorem 156 7.3 Equivalence Principle 158 7.4 Radiated Fields 160 7.5 Uniform Distribution in a Rectangular Aperture 161 7.6 Uniform Distribution in a Circular Aperture 166 7.7 Microstrip Antennas 170 7.7.1 Application of Theory 172 7.7.2 Design of a Linearly Polarized Microstrip Antenna 175 7.7.3 Design of a Circularly Polarized Microstrip Antenna 179 7.8 Problems 185 References 188 8 Array Antennas 189 8.1 A Linear Array of Non-Isotropic Point-Source Radiators 189 8.2 Array Factor 195 8.3 Side Lobes and Grating Lobes 195 8.3.1 Side-Lobe Level 196 8.3.2 Grating Lobes 196 8.4 Linear Phase Taper 197 8.5 Grating Lobes 202 8.6 Special Topics 203 8.6.1 Mutual Coupling 203 8.6.2 Antenna Diversity 212 8.6.3 Sequential Rotation and Phasing 213 8.7 Array Antenna Design 217 8.7.1 Theory 220 8.7.2 A Linear Microstrip Patch Array Antenna 221 8.8 Problems 229 References 230 Appendix A Effective Aperture and Directivity 231 Appendix B Vector Formulas 235 Appendix C Complex Analysis 237 C.1 Complex Numbers 237 C.2 Use of Complex Variables 240 Appendix D Physical Constants and Material Parameters 243 References 244 Appendix E Two-Port Network Parameters 245 Appendix F Transmission Line Theory 249 F.1 Distributed Parameters 249 F.2 Guided Waves 252 F.2.1 VSWR and Reflection Factor 254 F.2.2 Impedance and Relative Impedance 254 F.3 Input Impedance of a Transmission Line 255 F.4 Terminated Lossless Transmission Line 255 F.4.1 Matched Load 255 F.4.2 Short Circuit 256 F.4.3 Open Circuit 256 F.4.4 Imaginary Unit Termination 257 F.4.5 Real Termination 257 F.5 Quarter Wavelength Impedance Transformer 257 Appendix G Coplanar Waveguide (CPW) 259 References 260 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisFor the student and general reader, a tour of the digital universe that offers critical observations and new perspectives on human communication and intelligence. Traces the development and diffusion of digital information and communication technologies, providing an analysis of trans-cultural effects among developed and developing nations Provides a balanced analysis of the pros and cons of the adoption and diffusion of digital technologies Explores privacy, censorship, the digital divide, online games, and virtual and augmented realities Follows a thematic structure, allowing readers to access the text at any point, based on their interests Accompanying resources provide a wealth of related online content Selected by Choice as a 2013 Outstanding Academic Title Trade ReviewNamed CHOICE Outstanding Title for 2012 “There are some really nice touches in this book. It is well written. The cases are accessible and relevant. The tables, lists, and some of the figures lucidly present taxonomies and provide chronological information on important topics.” (International Journal of Communication, 1 August 2012) “Summing Up: Highly recommended. All readership levels. (Choice, 1 August 2012)Table of ContentsPreface vii Acknowledgments ix Some Key Terms xi Part I Introduction and Framing 1 1 The Digital Universe: A "Quick-Start" Introduction 3 2 Thinking About Moore's Law 14 3 Critical Perspectives 25 Part II Internet and Web History 41 4 Origins of the Internet 43 5 Internet Evolution 64 6 The Web 82 Part III Telecommunication and Media Convergence 103 7 Telecommunication and the "Flat" World 105 8 Digital Media Convergence 127 Part IV Internet Control, Cyberculture, and Dystopian Views 143 9 The Public and Private Internet 145 10 Censorship and Global Cyberculture 168 11 The Dark Side 186 Part V New Communication Technologies and the Future 205 12 Wired and Wireless Technologies 207 13 Virtual and Augmented Worlds 226 14 The Future of the Digital Universe 253 Index 270

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book traces the development of the broadcasting system in Canada from the inception of television in 1952 to the passing of the Broadcast Act of 1968, focusing on the policy decisions made by governments and broadcasting authorities and the circumstances under which they were made. Several public investigations of the system and its performance took place during television's first sixteen years in Canada and their aims and outcomes form an important part of the story.The book deals with the relationships between the CBC, the private broadcasters, government, and the regulatory authority, and also with events that affected the perceptions of politicians and the public - the French network strike in 1959, the Preview Commentary affair of the same year, and the controversies surrounding the CBC program 'This Hour Has Seven Days' in 1965-6. Among those who figure prominently are A. Davidson Dunton and Alphonse Ouimet of the CBC; T.J. Allard and Don Jamieson of the Canadian A

Read more less

Book SynopsisInformation and communication technologies (ICTs) are an accelerator in closing the "accountability gap" for more open and collaborative governance.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe End of the CBC? is about three overlapping crises: the crisis that has enveloped the CBC, the crisis of news, and the crisis of democracy. The emergence of platforms such as Google, Facebook, Twitter, and Netflix, the hyper-targeting of individual users through data analytics, the development of narrow online identity communities, and the rise of an attention economy have changed the media landscape in dramatic ways. Describing the failure of successive governments to address problems faced by the public broadcaster, this book explains how the CBC lost its place in sports, drama, and entertainment. Taras and Waddell propose a way forward for the CBC one in which the corporation concentrates its resources on news and current affairs and re-establishes a reputation for depth and quality.Trade Review"The End of the CBC? is a book that should be read by anyone who cares about how journalism and democracy intersect." -- Tony Burman * The Toronto Star, February 29, 2020 *"In many ways, this timely and thought-provoking book is more about saving Canadian journalism than about saving the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation." -- Beth Haddon * Literary Review of Canada *"The End of the CBC? argues that Canada’s public broadcaster must rapidly and quite savagely reinvent itself or risk ‘oblivion.’ And it is nothing if not timely reading." -- Chris Selley * The National Post, March 20, 2020 *Table of ContentsPreface 1. Introduction 2. Lost Horizons 3. The Politics of Resentment and Neglect 4. The CBC in the Digital Storm 5. The Collapse of Sports and News 6. The Trials and Triumphs of the CBC's Online World 7. More Dashed Hopes 8. Reinvent the CBC or Allow It to Die Notes Bibiography Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAfter almost 90 years, the CBC, Canada's public broadcaster, has reached a crossroads. This book examines the political, economic, social, media, and cultural forces that have pushed the CBC to the point where it must be reimagined and re-invented.Trade Review"The End of the CBC? is a book that should be read by anyone who cares about how journalism and democracy intersect." -- Tony Burman * The Toronto Star, February 29, 2020 *Table of ContentsPreface 1. Introduction 2. Lost Horizons 3. The Politics of Resentment and Neglect 4. The CBC in the Digital Storm 5. The Collapse of Sports and News 6. The Trials and Triumphs of the CBC's Online World 7. More Dashed Hopes 8. Reinvent the CBC or Allow It to Die Notes Bibiography Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisLike the popular guides The MX Series and Juniper QFX5100 Series, this practical book-written by the same author-introduces new QFX10000 concepts in switching and virtualization, specifically in the core of the data center network. This new book by Douglas Hanks is the authoritative guide

Read more less

Book SynopsisA complete history and theory of internet daemons brings these little-known—but very consequential—programs into the spotlight We’re used to talking about how tech giants like Google, Facebook, and Amazon rule the internet, but what about daemons? Ubiquitous programs that have colonized the Net’s infrastructure—as well as the devices we use to access it—daemons are little known. Fenwick McKelvey weaves together history, theory, and policy to give a full account of where daemons come from and how they influence our lives—including their role in hot-button issues like network neutrality.Going back to Victorian times and the popular thought experiment Maxwell’s Demon, McKelvey charts how daemons evolved from concept to reality, eventually blossoming into the pandaemonium of code-based creatures that today orchestrates our internet. Digging into real-life examples like sluggish connection speeds, Comcast’s efforts to control peer-to-peer networking, and Pirate Bay’s attempts to elude daemonic control (and skirt copyright), McKelvey shows how daemons have been central to the internet, greatly influencing everyday users.Internet Daemons asks important questions about how much control is being handed over to these automated, autonomous programs, and the consequences for transparency and oversight.Trade Review"Beneath social media, beneath search, Internet Daemons reveals another layer of algorithms: deeper, burrowed into information networks. Fenwick McKelvey is the best kind of intellectual spelunker, taking us deep into the infrastructure and shining his light on these obscure but vital mechanisms. What he has delivered is a precise and provocative rethinking of how to conceive of power in and among networks."—Tarleton Gillespie, author of Custodians of the Internet"Internet Daemons is an original and important contribution to the field of digital media studies. Fenwick McKelvey extensively maps and analyzes how daemons influence data exchanges across Internet infrastructures. This study insightfully demonstrates how daemons are transformative entities that enable particular ways of transferring information and connecting up communication, with significant social and political consequences."—Jennifer Gabrys, author of Program EarthTable of ContentsAbbreviations and Technical TermsIntroduction1. The Devil We Know: Maxwell’s Demon, Cyborg Sciences, and Flow Control2. Possessing Infrastructure: Nonsynchronous Communication, IMPs, and Optimization3. IMPs, OLIVERs, and Gateways: Internetworking before the Internet4. Pandaemonium: The Internet as Daemons5. Suffering from Buffering? Affects of Flow Control6. The Disoptimized: The Ambiguous Tactics of the Pirate Bay7. A Crescendo of Online Interactive Debugging? Gamers, Publics and DaemonsConclusionAcknowledgmentsAppendix: Internet Measurement and MediatorsNotesBibliographyIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisA complete history and theory of internet daemons brings these little-known—but very consequential—programs into the spotlight We’re used to talking about how tech giants like Google, Facebook, and Amazon rule the internet, but what about daemons? Ubiquitous programs that have colonized the Net’s infrastructure—as well as the devices we use to access it—daemons are little known. Fenwick McKelvey weaves together history, theory, and policy to give a full account of where daemons come from and how they influence our lives—including their role in hot-button issues like network neutrality.Going back to Victorian times and the popular thought experiment Maxwell’s Demon, McKelvey charts how daemons evolved from concept to reality, eventually blossoming into the pandaemonium of code-based creatures that today orchestrates our internet. Digging into real-life examples like sluggish connection speeds, Comcast’s efforts to control peer-to-peer networking, and Pirate Bay’s attempts to elude daemonic control (and skirt copyright), McKelvey shows how daemons have been central to the internet, greatly influencing everyday users.Internet Daemons asks important questions about how much control is being handed over to these automated, autonomous programs, and the consequences for transparency and oversight.Trade Review"Beneath social media, beneath search, Internet Daemons reveals another layer of algorithms: deeper, burrowed into information networks. Fenwick McKelvey is the best kind of intellectual spelunker, taking us deep into the infrastructure and shining his light on these obscure but vital mechanisms. What he has delivered is a precise and provocative rethinking of how to conceive of power in and among networks."—Tarleton Gillespie, author of Custodians of the Internet"Internet Daemons is an original and important contribution to the field of digital media studies. Fenwick McKelvey extensively maps and analyzes how daemons influence data exchanges across Internet infrastructures. This study insightfully demonstrates how daemons are transformative entities that enable particular ways of transferring information and connecting up communication, with significant social and political consequences."—Jennifer Gabrys, author of Program EarthTable of ContentsAbbreviations and Technical TermsIntroduction1. The Devil We Know: Maxwell’s Demon, Cyborg Sciences, and Flow Control2. Possessing Infrastructure: Nonsynchronous Communication, IMPs, and Optimization3. IMPs, OLIVERs, and Gateways: Internetworking before the Internet4. Pandaemonium: The Internet as Daemons5. Suffering from Buffering? Affects of Flow Control6. The Disoptimized: The Ambiguous Tactics of the Pirate Bay7. A Crescendo of Online Interactive Debugging? Gamers, Publics and DaemonsConclusionAcknowledgmentsAppendix: Internet Measurement and MediatorsNotesBibliographyIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisSpectrum sensing deals with several subjects, that range from statistical and probability theory to radio propagation and signal processing, with cognitive radio playing an important role to the evolution and dissemination of new applications in the area. The objective of this book is to connect the basic statistical formulation, the fundamental concepts from signal detection and spectrum sensing, cognitive radio and dynamic spectrum access, leading to an interesting, robust, and illustrative content, with recent practical applications of cognitive radio and spectrum sensing.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis new resource introduces students and researchers to the fundamentals of information technology using easy-to-understand language that provides both a solid background and a deeper understanding and appreciation of this important and evolving subject. As a broad field that encompasses many of the key technologies of the early twenty-first century, information technology is poised to remain a major field of study and professional practice for years to come.As a broad field that encompasses many of the key technologies of the early twenty-first century, infor­mation technology is poised to remain a major field of study and professional practice for years to come. The field will continue to evolve as new developments in the current tech­nologies are discovered. Information technologies are also highly dependent on human beings who design, operate, and benefit from them. As such, students and practitioners in the field need to develop both a deep knowledge of the technologies used to store, retrieve, and send information and a strong understanding of humankind’s complex rela­tionships with information and with the technologies themselves.Over 120 topics are explored in-depth, including: Artificial Intelligence Programming Languages Cloud Computing Software Architecture Debugging Speech-Recognition Software Encryption Virtual Reality Each entry includes an Abstract that provides a brief, concrete summary of the topic and its significance; a detailed Essay that provides extensive background on the topic and explores its significance to the field of information technology; and a list of Further Reading for those who wish to pursue the topic in more depth. This volume will be an important addition to high school and undergraduate libraries, especially those focused on technology, science, and information studies.With over 120 essays, this new volume gives readers an overview of the major concepts and contemporary issues surrounding the study of information technology. Designed for students and researchers, this volume provides new ways to think about and study issues, policies, and practices in this field. This will be a helpful addition to science and technology programs at the high school, community college, and university levels, and is a must for STEM students at the high school and undergraduate levels.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe main aim of this book is to offer companies a simple and practical method to assess their maturity in the Governance Information System, so that they are in working order to face the challenges of Digital Transformation. How can companies effectively manage their investment in IT systems and make the most of their development?Table of ContentsForeword ix Preface xv Acknowledgments xxiii Part 1. Information Systems Governance at the Service of the Digital Transformation 1 Chapter 1. Enterprise Governance: A Framework that Includes IS Governance 3 Chapter 2. Challenges of Enterprise IS Governance 11 2.1. Value creation 13 2.2. IS risk management 16 Chapter 3. Objectives, Approaches and Key Success Factors of Enterprise IS Governance 21 3.1. Objectives of Enterprise IS governance (EISG) 21 3.2. Approaches, frameworks and ongoing reflections 23 3.3. Benefits of the approach and its key success factors 27 Chapter 4. How Can the Maturity of Enterprise IS Governance be Improved? 29 4.1. Scope of EISG and assessment of the company’s global maturity level 29 4.2. How can it be properly initiated? 33 4.3. What can be done once the diagnostics have been made? 34 4.4. How can the improvement process be initiated? 35 Part 2. Evaluation of the Maturity of Enterprise Information Systems Governance 37 Chapter 5. Maturity Evaluation Criteria for Each of the 11 Vectors 39 5.1. Vector 1: IS planning and integration into the overall company’s planning process 40 5.1.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 40 5.1.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to the IS gonernance 40 5.1.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 41 5.2. Vector 2: IS urbanization at the service of strategic challenges in the frame of the Enterprise Architecture 44 5.2.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 44 5.2.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to the IS governance 44 5.2.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s level maturity in the vector 46 5.3. Vector 3: Portfolio management of value creation-oriented projects 49 5.3.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 49 5.3.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to the IS governance 50 5.3.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 52 5.4. Vector 4: alignment of the IT organization with respect to business processes 57 5.4.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 57 5.4.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to IS governance 57 5.4.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 60 5.5. Vector 5: IS-related budgetary management and costs control promoting transparency 64 5.5.1. Vector challenges in the digital transformation 64 5.5.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to IS governance 65 5.5.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 67 5.6. Vector 6: project management with respect to business objectives 73 5.6.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 73 5.6.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to the IS governance 74 5.6.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 76 5.7. Vector 7: provision of IT services optimized with respect to clients’ expectations 81 5.7.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 81 5.7.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to IS governance 81 5.7.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s level of maturity in the vector 87 5.8. Vector 8: prospective management of IT skills 95 5.8.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 95 5.8.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to IS governance 95 5.8.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 98 5.9. Vector 9: IS-related risk management adapted to business challenges 101 5.9.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 101 5.9.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to IS Governance 102 5.9.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 103 5.10. Vector 10: management and measurement of IS performance 107 5.10.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 107 5.10.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to IS governance 108 5.10.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 109 5.11. Vector 11: IS-related communication management 112 5.11.1. Issues of this vector in the digital transformation 112 5.11.2. Issues of the vector in terms of contribution to IS governance 112 5.11.3. Best practices associated with the vector and measurement of the company’s maturity level in the vector 113 Appendices 117 Appendix 1: IT Scorecard 119 Appendix 2: Economic Steering of IT Department 123 Appendix 3: Glossary 129 Bibliography 137 Index 141

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe parameter estimation and hypothesis testing are the basic tools in statistical inference. These techniques occur in many applications of data processing., and methods of Monte Carlo have become an essential tool to assess performance. For pedagogical purposes the book includes several computational problems and exercices. To prevent students from getting stuck on exercises, detailed corrections are provided.Table of ContentsPreface ix Notations and Abbreviations xi A Few Functions of Python® xiii Chapter 1 Useful Maths 1 1.1. Basic concepts on probability 1 1.2. Conditional expectation 10 1.3. Projection theorem 11 1.3.1. Conditional expectation 14 1.4. Gaussianity 14 1.4.1. Gaussian random variable 14 1.4.2. Gaussian random vectors 15 1.4.3. Gaussian conditional distribution 16 1.5. Random variable transformation 18 1.5.1. General expression 18 1.5.2. Law of the sum of two random variables 19 1.5.3. δ-method 20 1.6. Fundamental theorems of statistics 22 1.7. A few probability distributions 24 Chapter 2 Statistical Inferences 29 2.1. First step: visualizing data 29 2.1.1. Scatter plot 29 2.1.2. Histogram/boxplot 30 2.1.3. Q-Q plot 32 2.2. Reduction of dataset dimensionality 34 2.2.1. PCA 34 2.2.2. LDA 36 2.3. Some vocabulary 40 2.3.1. Statistical inference 40 2.4. Statistical model 41 2.4.1. Notation 42 2.5. Hypothesis testing 43 2.5.1. Simple hypotheses 45 2.5.2. Generalized likelihood ratio test (GLRT) 50 2.5.3. χ 2 goodness-of-fit test 57 2.6. Statistical estimation 58 2.6.1. General principles 58 2.6.2. Least squares method 62 2.6.3. Least squares method for the linear model 64 2.6.4. Method of moments 81 2.6.5. Maximum likelihood approach 84 2.6.6. Logistic regression 100 2.6.7. Non-parametric estimation of probability distribution 103 2.6.8. Bootstrap and others 107 Chapter 3 Inferences on HMM 113 3.1. Hidden Markov models (HMM) 113 3.2. Inferences on HMM 116 3.3. Filtering: general case 117 3.4. Gaussian linear case: Kalman algorithm 118 3.4.1. Kalman filter 118 3.4.2. RTS smoother 127 3.5. Discrete finite Markov case 129 3.5.1. Forward-backward formulas 130 3.5.2. Smoothing formula at one instant 133 3.5.3. Smoothing formula at two successive instants 134 3.5.4. HMM learning using the EM algorithm 135 3.5.5. The Viterbi algorithm 137 Chapter 4 Monte-Carlo Methods 141 4.1. Fundamental theorems 141 4.2. Stating the problem 141 4.3. Generating random variables 144 4.3.1. The cumulative function inversion method 144 4.3.2. The variable transformation method 147 4.3.3. Acceptance-rejection method 149 4.3.4. Sequential methods 151 4.4. Variance reduction 156 4.4.1. Importance sampling 156 4.4.2. Stratification 160 4.4.3. Antithetic variates 164 Chapter 5 Hints and Solutions 167 5.1. Useful maths 167 5.2. Statistical inferences 170 5.3. Inferences on HMM 226 5.4. Monte-Carlo methods 251 Bibliography 261 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe aim of this book is the study of signals and deterministic systems, linear, time-invariant, finite dimensions and causal. A set of useful tools is selected for the automatic and signal processing and methods of representation of dynamic linear systems are exposed, and analysis of their behavior. Finally we discuss the estimation, identification and synthesis of control laws for the purpose of stabilization and regulation.Table of ContentsPreface ix Chapter 1 Control, Servo-mechanisms and System Regulation 1 1.1. Introduction 1 1.1.1. Generalities and definitions 1 1.1.2. Control law synthesis 5 1.1.3. Comprehension and application exercises 7 1.2. Process control 11 1.2.1. Correction in the frequency domain 11 1.2.2. Phase advance controller and PD controller 12 1.2.3. Phase delay controller and integrator compensator 14 1.2.4. Proportional, integral and derivative (PID) control 17 1.3. Some application exercises 23 1.3.1. Identification of the transfer function and control 23 1.3.2. PI control 30 1.3.3. Phase advance control 33 1.4. Some application exercises 36 1.5. Application 1: stabilization of a rigid robot with pneumatic actuator 39 1.5.1. Conventional approach 41 1.6. Application 2: temperature control of an oven 51 1.6.1. Modeling and identification study 51 Chapter 2 System Process Control 55 2.1. Introduction 55 2.2. Modeling 55 2.2.1. Introduction 55 2.3. Governability, controllability and observability 56 2.3.1. Characteristic polynomial, minimal polynomial and Cayley–Hamilton theorem 56 2.3.2. Governability or controllability 56 2.3.3. Observability 63 2.3.4. Observer 68 2.3.5. Observer for state reconstruction 69 2.3.6. Minimal state–space representation 76 2.4. State feedback, control by poles placement and stability 79 2.4.1. State feedback control 79 2.4.2. Poles placement and stabilizability 80 2.4.3. Finite-time response for a discrete system, deadbeat response 83 2.4.4. Use of observers in control: separation principle 85 2.5. Linear quadratic (LQ) control 86 2.5.1. Linear quadratic regulator 89 2.6. Optimal control (LQ) 90 2.7. Comprehension and application exercises 94 Chapter 3 Actuators: Modeling and Analysis 117 3.1. Introduction: electric, hydraulic and pneumatic actuators 117 3.1.1. Representation methods for physical systems 118 3.1.2. Modeling of a few constituents of physical systems 120 3.2. Transmission chains, actuators and sensors 126 3.2.1. Electric actuators in robotics 126 3.2.2. Motor speed torque characteristic 131 3.2.3. Dynamic behavior or transient behavior 131 3.2.4. Electric systems motor load 134 3.3. Pneumatic actuators 137 3.3.1. Pneumatic system modeling 137 3.3.2. Frictions model 145 3.4. Hydraulic actuators 149 3.4.1. System description 149 3.4.2. Mechanical model 151 3.4.3. Hydraulic actuator model 152 3.5. Application exercises 155 Chapter 4 Digital Control and Polynomial Approach 161 4.1. Introduction to digital control 161 4.1.1. Digital controller synthesis by transposition 162 4.1.2. Euler’s transposition 164 4.1.3. Choice of the sampling period (Shannon’s theorem) 170 4.2. PID controller synthesis and its equivalent digital RST 171 4.2.1. Standard controllers 171 4.2.2. Study of digital PIDs 172 4.2.3. Digital RST controller synthesis 178 4.2.4. Choice of poles and zeros to compensate 179 4.2.5 Computation of polynomials R, S and T 180 4.2.6. Additional objectives for synthesis 181 4.3. Digital control by poles placement 182 4.3.1. Choice of the sampling period 183 4.4. Diophantine, Bézout, greatest common divisor, least common multiple and division 183 4.4.1. Polynomial arithmetic 183 4.4.2. Diophantine equation ax + by = c and Bachet–Bézout theorem 184 4.4.3. Bézout’s identity 185 4.4.4. Greatest common divisor 185 4.4.5. Least common multiple 185 4.5. A few comprehension and application exercises 186 Chapter 5 NAO Robot 193 5.1. Introduction 193 5.2. Home care project 194 5.2.1. Choregraphe software 194 5.2.2. Nao Matlab SDK research 199 5.2.3. Nao and home care 206 5.2.4. The actions to be made 207 5.3. Details of the various programs 208 5.3.1. Ask for news 208 5.3.2. CallFirefighters box 212 5.3.3. CallNeighbor box 213 5.3.4. CallFamily box 215 5.3.5. Collision detection 215 5.3.6. Special actions: waking-up 216 5.3.7. Morning hygiene 220 5.3.8. Gymnastics 221 5.3.9. Nurse call 225 5.3.10. Memory game 227 5.3.11. Drugs reminder 232 5.3.12. Reading 233 5.3.13. Listening to music 235 5.3.14. Multiplication game 239 5.3.15. Nao’s dance 243 5.3.16. Memory game 245 5.3.17. Detect person on the ground 247 5.3.18. At any time 251 5.4. Conclusion 253 5.4.1. Nao’s limitations and possible improvements 253 Chapter 6 Application Problems with Solutions 255 6.1. Exercise 6.1: car suspension 255 6.1.1. Modeling 256 6.1.2. Analysis 257 6.2. Exercise 6.2: electromechanical system 259 6.2.1. Modeling 260 6.2.2. Analysis 262 6.3. Exercises: identification and state–space representation 263 6.3.1. Exercise 6.3 263 6.3.2. Exercise 6.4 265 6.3.3. Exercise 6.5 268 6.3.4. Exercise 6.6 270 6.3.5. Exercise 6.7 276 6.4. Exercises: observation and control of nonlinear systems 278 6.4.1. Exercise 6.8 278 6.4.2. Exercise 6.9 280 6.4.3. Exercise 6.10 288 6.4.4. Exercise 6.11 291 6.4.5. Exercise 6.12 293 6.4.6. Exercise 6.13 296 6.4.7. Exercise 6.14 300 6.4.8. Exercise 6.15 300 Bibliography 307 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe adoption of smartphones has had as a corollary the use of services that require streaming, such as video streaming, which is a constraint for the 4G mobile network. The integration of the network of Wi-Fi hotspots deployed by the operators adds capacity to the 4G mobile network.The use of Wi-Fi technology in carrier networks is the result of developments coordinated by the IEEE, WFA and WBA standardization bodies. For its part, the 3GPP standardization body has been working to integrate Wi-Fi technology into the 4G mobile network.The first part of this book presents the characteristics of the Wi-Fi radio interface. The different IEEE 802.11b / g / n / ac physical layers characterize the implementation in the 2.4 GHz ISM frequency bands and U- NII at 5 GHz. The MAC layer defines a number of media access procedures such as scanning, associating, or transferring data.The second part of this book deals with the architecture of the 4G network based on the Wi-Fi interface. This architecture defines several models corresponding, on the one hand, to Wi-Fi access controlled or not, On the other hand, to a handover controlled by the network or by the mobile. The integration of Wi-Fi technology resulted in a redefinition of attachment and session set-up procedures.Smartphones have the ability to activate simultaneously the two radio interfaces, LTE and Wi-Fi, which allows to direct certain services to one and / or the other of the interfaces. The ANDSF and HotSpot 2.0 functions provide the mobile with rules for network selection and traffic control to determine which traffic is to be routed to what type of interface.Table of ContentsList of Abbreviations xi Introduction xxiii Chapter 1 Architecture Based on Wi-Fi Access 1 1.1 Functional architecture 1 1.1.1 Architecture based on the S2a interface 1 1.1.2 Architecture based on the S2b interface 4 1.1.3 Architecture based on the S2c interface 7 1.2 Tunnel establishment 8 1.2.1 Architecture based on the S2a interface 8 1.2.2 Architecture based on the S2b interface 12 1.2.3 Architecture based on the S2c interface 13 1.3 DIAMETER protocol 14 1.3.1 AAA server interfaces 15 1.3.2 PCRF interfaces 20 Chapter 2 MAC Layer 23 2.1 Frame structure 23 2.1.1 Frame header 23 2.1.2 Structure of control frames 25 2.1.3 Structure of management frames 26 2.2 Procedures 30 2.2.1 Timers 30 2.2.2 Mobile registration 30 2.2.3 Data transfer 32 2.2.4 Clear channel assessment 34 2.2.5 Frame fragmentation 36 2.2.6 Standby management 36 2.3 Security 38 2.3.1 Security mechanism 38 2.3.2 Security policies 39 2.3.3 MAC header extension 39 2.4 Quality of service 46 2.4.1 EDCA mechanism 46 2.4.2 Impact on the MAC header 48 Chapter 3 802.11a/g Interfaces 49 3.1 802.11a interface 49 3.1.1 PLCP sub-layer 49 3.1.2 PMD sub-layer 51 3.2 802.11g interface 58 3.2.1 PLCP sub-layer 58 3.2.2 PMD sub-layer 61 Chapter 4 802.11n Interface 63 4.1 MAC layer evolution 63 4.1.1 Management frames 64 4.1.2 Structure of the MAC header 66 4.1.3 Frame aggregation 68 4.1.4 Control frames 70 4.2 PLCP sub-layer 72 4.3 PMD sub-layer 75 4.3.1 Transmission chain 75 4.3.2 Frequency plan 78 4.3.3 Frequency multiplexing 78 4.3.4 Space multiplexing 79 4.3.5 Modulation and coding scheme 81 Chapter 5 802.11ac Interface 85 5.1 MAC layer 85 5.1.1 Management frame evolution 85 5.1.2 Control frames 89 5.1.3 MAC header structure 90 5.2 PLCP sub-layer 92 5.3 PMD sub-layer 94 5.3.1 Transmission chain 94 5.3.2 Frequency plan 99 5.3.3 Frequency multiplexing 100 5.3.4 Spatial multiplexing 101 5.3.5 Modulation and coding scheme 102 Chapter 6 Mutual Authentication 105 6.1 802.1x mechanism 105 6.1.1 EAPOL protocol 107 6.1.2 EAP 109 6.1.3 RADIUS messages 111 6.1.4 Authentication procedure 112 6.2 Key management 114 6.2.1 Key hierarchy 114 6.2.2 Four-way handshake procedure 115 6.2.3 Group Key Handshake procedure 116 6.3 Application to the 4G mobile network 117 6.3.1 EAP-AKA method 117 6.3.2 Mutual authentication procedure 118 6.3.3 Procedure for rapid renewal of authentication 121 6.3.4 Application to the MIPv4 FA mechanism 122 Chapter 7 SWu Tunnel Establishment 125 7.1 IPSec mechanism 125 7.1.1 Header extensions 127 7.1.2 IKEv2 protocol 131 7.1.3 Procedure 137 7.2 Application to the 4G mobile network 142 7.2.1 SWu tunnel establishment procedure 142 7.2.2 Procedure for rapid renewal of authentication 145 Chapter 8 S2a/S2b Tunnel Establishment 147 8.1 PMIPv6 mechanism 147 8.1.1 Mobility extension 148 8.1.2 Procedures 149 8.1.3 Application to the 4G mobile network 151 8.2 GTPv2 mechanism 155 8.2.1 Trusted Wi-Fi access 156 8.2.2 Untrusted Wi-Fi access 158 8.3 MIPv4 FA mechanism 158 8.3.1 Components of mobility 158 8.3.2 Foreign agent discovery 159 8.3.3 Registration 160 8.3.4 Procedure 160 8.3.5 Application to the 4G mobile network 162 Chapter 9 S2c Tunnel Establishment 165 9.1 MIPv6 mechanism 165 9.1.1 IPv6 header extensions 166 9.1.2 ICMPv6 messages 169 9.1.3 Procedures 171 9.2 DSMIPv6 mechanism 177 9.3 Application to the 4G mobile network 178 9.3.1 Trusted Wi-Fi access 178 9.3.2 Untrusted Wi-Fi access 179 9.3.3 IFOM function 180 Chapter 10 Network Discovery and Selection 183 10.1 Mechanisms defined by 3GPP organization 183 10.1.1 ANDSF function 183 10.1.2 RAN assistance 191 10.2 Mechanisms defined by IEEE and WFA organizations 192 10.2.1 Information elements provided by the beacon 194 10.2.2 Information elements provided by the ANQP server 195 Chapter 11 Carrier Aggregation 201 11.1 Functional architecture 201 11.2 Protocol architecture 202 11.2.1 LWA 202 11.2.2 LWIP aggregation 205 11.2.3 LAA aggregation 207 11.3 Procedures 207 11.3.1 LWA 207 11.3.2 LWIP aggregation 211 11.3.3 LAA aggregation 212 11.4 PDCP 214 Chapter 12 MPTCP Aggregation 217 12.1 Functional architecture 217 12.2 TCP 218 12.2.1 TCP header 218 12.2.2 Opening and closing a connection 220 12.2.3 Data transfer 221 12.2.4 Slow Start and Congestion Avoidance mechanisms 221 12.2.5 Fast Retransmit and Fast Recovery mechanisms 222 12.2.6 ECN mechanism 224 12.3 MPTCP 226 12.3.1 Establishment of MPTCP connection 227 12.3.2 Adding a TCP connection 227 12.3.3 Data transfer 229 12.3.4 Closing an MPTCP connection 231 12.3.5 Adding and removing an address 233 12.3.6 Return to the TCP connection 234 Bibliography 235 Index 239

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe high level of innovation currently transforming our society and its technological dynamics can be seen as a second wave of innovation of the third technological system, which emerged in the late 1970s. This book discusses the concept of technological systems, focusing on the tools used for formalizing the organization of technology in society and its dynamics of evolution. The author uses these tools to characterize the contemporary technological system and to model its specific dynamics. In doing so, he raises questions about the continuity of the current technological system, and its capacity to generate powerful innovatory movements.Table of ContentsIntroduction ix Chapter 1 How Can a Technological System be Understood and Analyzed? 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The construction of technology analysis models in systems 2 1.2.1 The ontological approach of the technological system, a vision of structure 2 1.2.2 Interdependence and technological coherence: the systemic principle of dynamics of technological systems 6 1.3 The representation of the movement: the technological lifecycle, the discontinuity of the technical movement 9 1.3.1 The technological lifecycle 9 1.3.2 The formalisms of the lifecycle: the S-curve 10 1.3.3 The conditional stability of the S-curve: interaction between the individual lifecycle and the global technology movement 11 1.4 Model for the internal restructuring of technology systems by means of the three components: technique–architecture–function 12 1.4.1 A formalization of the technical system components: the technique– architecture–function articulation 12 1.4.2 The dynamics of interaction by the function–architecture–principle relation 14 1.4.3 Technological systems, waves of innovation and technological revolutions 15 1.4.4 Dynamics of the technological system and social system 16 Chapter 2 The Historical Dynamics of Technological Systems: Putting the Contemporary Technological System into Historical Perspective 19 2.1 The great pre-industrial technological system 19 2.1.1. The industrial revolution of the 12th Century The medieval wave of a permanent innovation movement 20 2.1.2 The rebound in the “Renaissance” – is there a technological and innovative specificity of the Renaissance? 24 2.1.3 Stabilization and classical maturity 27 2.2 The English Industrial Revolution and the first industrial technological system 28 Chapter 3 The Contemporary Technological System Emerges from the Previous One or the Third Technological Revolution 31 3.1 The second industrial technological system 31 3.1.1 The new generic technologies at the origin of this second system 31 3.1.2 The formation of the second technological system 36 3.1.3 A technological system for one hundred years 39 3.2 The electromechanical technological system crisis 41 3.2.1 The saturation of generic technologies and its direct manifestations 42 3.2.2 Some of the indirect and global manifestations of the technological system crisis 48 3.2.3 The technological system and organization crisis 55 Chapter 4 Formation of the Third Technological System and First Wave of the New Technological System 63 4.1 Emergence of new generic technologies 64 4.1.1 From computing to information technologies 64 4.1.2 The hyper choice of materials 73 4.1.3 Biotechnologies 76 4.1.4 Energy: originality in diversity 81 4.2 The structuring of the new technological system 83 4.2.1 The formation of the technological network 84 4.3 Societal and epistemological transformation 88 4.3.1 A technical and economic transformation 88 4.3.2 A scientific and epistemological transformation 91 Chapter 5 The Second Wave of the Third Technological System 95 5.1 Maturation and bifurcation of generic technologies generating a second technological wave 96 5.1.1 Continuation of the development of information technology 96 5.1.2 The second age of materials 97 5.1.3 Development of photonics 98 5.1.4 The rise of biology 99 5.1.5 Deepening energy diversification 101 5.1.6 A new dimension of generic technologies: nanometric properties 104 5.2 Applications re-composition and development 105 5.2.1 A movement driven by technology convergence: the five re-composition forces of the technological system 105 5.2.2 New applications through convergence 108 5.3 The wave of new technical systems, new objects and new functionality 113 5.3.1 The system of networks and connections 114 5.3.2 Virtual reality 116 5.3.3 Smart objects 118 5.3.4 A new world of production 121 5.3.5 Bio- and nanotechnology systems 122 5.3.6 Versatile incremental innovation 123 5.4 Environmental pressure, a source of change in the trajectory of innovation 124 5.4.1 Capture, storage and re-use of CO2 128 Chapter 6 The Second Wave of the Technology System Transforms and Reorganizes Economy and Social Systems 131 6.1 New markets, new industries, new business models 132 6.1.1 New products, re-composition of products and functions, new markets 132 6.1.2 A sectorial re-composition of economies 134 6.1.3 New consumption patterns, new marketing methods 135 6.1.4 New business models 136 6.1.5 New form of competition, new concentration 136 6.2 Disruption of the production system 137 6.2.1 The evolution of productivity 137 6.2.2 Productivity and employment 138 6.2.3 A polarization of the distribution of income 139 6.2.4 A globalized technological system, a possible bifurcation 140 6.3 New modes of economy 141 6.3.1 Growth paradoxes 141 6.3.2 The issue of value, the GDP crisis, the renewal of the accountability of the economy 142 6.4 Interaction with social dynamics 143 6.4.1 Upheaval of the organization and in work relationships 143 6.4.2 Renewal and reorganization of R&D 144 6.4.3 The educational model crisis and new ways of training 146 6.4.4 Governance crisis and search for new rules 147 Conclusion 151 Bibliography 157 Index 169

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe intelligence of a city is the capacity to learn: to learn the past, its history and the culture of its territory. Unlike the smart city, we do not build a city from scratch and there is nothing, there is no smart city standard car intelligence is measured this ability to fit into a territorial dynamic, a story and a culture. Continuous learning through instantaneous feedback provides the digital to understand and map the urban system and driver.Table of ContentsForeword ix Introduction xv Chapter 1. What Do We Mean by “Smart City” and Where Does This Idea Come From? 1 1.1. Not-so-smart smart cities! 3 1.2. The smoke and mirrors of smart cities 6 1.3. Other mirrors for other smoke: cities of the creative classes 12 1.4. So what is a “smart city”? 17 Chapter 2. The Challenges of Urban Development in the Context of the Third Industrial Revolution 21 2.1. The demographic and economic challenges: toward a change in economic model 21 2.2. Geopolitical challenges: the polar shift in development in favor of the south-west and the different strategies among industrialized and emerging countries 26 2.3. Energy transfer: the fossil fuel curse is not about to disappear.33 2.4. The six breakthroughs in urban development based on smart cities 37 Chapter 3. What Makes a City Smart? 43 3.1. Lessons from medieval cities 44 3.1.1. Architect-less cities? 45 3.1.2. How do cities become unintelligent? 49 3.2.A city is a system of life 52 3.3.Smart territory 54 3.3.1.Territory: an immaterial asset 54 3.3.2.The territory secretes innovation (and not the other way around) 58 3.3.3.The territorial dynamic in action 60 3.4.Are metropolises smart territories? 63 3.5.A city is not a collection of smarties 65 3.5.1.A city is a living system 65 3.5.2 which we understand today through new approaches 66 3.5.3 at the heart of which the sciences of complexity 67 3.5.4.help conjugate internal semi-stability and external instability 68 3.6.The dangers of a technocentric approach 70 Chapter 4. New Sciences of Cities 73 4.1.The more or less sympathetic myths of the ideal city 75 4.2.A city is an imbalanced system 79 4.2.1.Definition of an urban ecosystem 80 4.2.2.A city is a system in incomplete equilibrium 82 4.2.3.What is a city’s optimal size? 85 4.2.4.Size and inequalities are correlated 86 4.3.Smart city: an autopoietic system 89 4.4.A city must be designed as a “system of systems” 95 4.4.1.Modeling 99 4.4.2.Emergence 103 4.4.3.Evolution inside: the urban lifecycle management 105 4.4.4.System architecture as a frame of representation 107 4.4.5.The design method 109 4.4.6.Integration process: more efficiency for less 114 4.4.7.Integrating heterogeneous systems 118 Chapter 5. Smart City in Action 125 5.1.Two cities that should not exist: Norilsk and Singapore 125 5.1.1.Norilsk, the most polluted and polluting city in the world 125 5.1.2.Singapore, the smart nation 127 5.2.Pilot projects 133 5.2.1.The African city 134 5.2.2.The emergence of a territorial project through meaning: the case of Rhamna, in Morocco 136 5.2.3.Casablanca as a prototype for remedying to the tentacular growth of cities 141 5.2.4.Angola, Namibia: eco-design of a drinking water supply 146 5.2.5.Urban problem and economic transition: the Russian case of monotowns 153 5.3.The worksites of the smart city 159 5.3.1.The power of data 159 5.3.2.How much do smart cities cost? 171 5.3.3.The government of a smart city 179 5.3.4.What are the tasks and what is the form of a smart government for a smart city? 180 Conclusion 187 References 191 Index 203

Read more less